Home

Agilent Technologies N5181A/82A Portable Generator User Manual

1. a p Requests Print job Print job status Resources definiton Resources status Figure 15 Gateway connection to another printer domain Defining the local gateway The local gateway is defined as follows on a host which if possible should have a constant connection to the other Xprint V7 0 domain to which the connection is to be established xpadd gtw local_gw tp LOCAL ho local_host ga gtw_port np TCP pp GIP2 aa This command configures a local gateway named local_gw which administers the physical connection to the other Xprint V7 0 domain For local_gw any name s can be used it does make sense however to use names which indicate on which host the gateways are configured With the option ho local_host you specify the name of the host which is to act as the gateway from the local Xprint V7 0 domain to the other Xprint V7 0 domain 220 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Gateways The option ga gtw_port specifies which TCP IP port number is to be used The default is 9999 e The port number is very important as no two gateways with the same port l number can run on a system at any one time The option np TCP defines that the TCP IP protocol is used No other protocol can be specified For the connection to other Xprint V7 0 domains the print protocol must be selected with the option pp GIP2 With the aa option you can define that the gateway is activated automati
2. 0 00 4 37 Using other Xprint V7 0 objects 40 Job templates 000002 eee eee 44 Printing a document via a globally defined job template 44 Defining customized job templates 46 Managing printjobs 49 Selecting a printjob 2 200 49 Displaying print jobs oaoa a 55 Modifying a submitted printjob 61 Redirecting print jobs oaoa a 63 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Contents 6 3 2 6 5 4 Deleting print jobs 2 2 a ee 65 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 67 Responsibilities 02 2 22 0000 000 67 Xprint V7 0 architecture 2 2 ee eee 70 The Xprint V7 0 objects 2 2 ee ee ee 71 Administrative tasks under Xprint 79 Configuring Xprint V7 0 objects aoaaa 2 2 ee 79 Deleting Xprint V7 0 objects 220 80 Modifying Xprint V7 0 objects 2 81 Changing the status of Xprint V7 0 objects 82 Displaying information on Xprint V7 0 objects 82 Administering XprintV7 0 2 00 85 Rules for configuring the system 88 Defining an Xprint V7 0 domain 88 Configuring hosts 000000002 2 eee 89 Configuring printers 2 2 02 0200 0005 89 Configuring gateways 0200000007 92 Configuring XprintV7 0 0 95 Admi
3. Besides the options mentioned above there are numerous additional options for printing files with Xprint V7 0 For a complete overview of all the possible options see the description of the xpadd job command in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual U23841 J Z915 6 76 39 Using other Xprint V7 0 objects Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 3 5 Using other Xprint V7 0 objects The previous section has already mentioned a number of options which are in some cases closely related to each other For example the options for defining font settings and the options for defining page settings are logically connected Xprint V7 0 responds to this fact by providing two objects which combine logically connected settings These are the objects font fnt and form frm With the help of objects of these types the corresponding settings can be defined globally and called up for printing Instead of specifying several options e g for defining the font settings you only need to specify a single option which will activate a predefined font Here the following applies A font comprises all the options for font settings a form comprises a font as well as all the options for page and margin settings for a printout Fonts are assigned to forms and these in turn are assigned to printers By default every printer is assigned the GENERIC form which defines the default settings for the printer An administrator can define new fonts or for
4. E 9001 31 var spool Spo NO NO d241s045 root EPSON SQ var spool Spo NO YES d241s045 root GENERIC var spool Spo NO NO Providing a PCL with a comment for the administrator e If you want to assign to an existing PCL a comment for the Xprint V7 0 administrator use the following command xpmod pcl pcl_name ca for_ administrator where pci_name represents the unique name of a PCL and for_administrator stands for a comment which only the Xprint V7 0 administrator is to be able to display xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG 182 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering PCLs Examples To assign the user comment suitable_for_all_printers_XYZ to the PCL SELFDEFINED when adding the PCL to the system xpadd pcl SELFDEFINED cu suitable_for_all_printers_XYZ To assign the user comment suitable_for_all_printers_XYZ_except_for_model_T to the PCL SELFDEFINED which already exists in the system xpmod pcl SELFDEFINED cu suitable_for_all_printers_XYZ_except_for_model_T 6 13 4 Assigning a PCL to a printer Every printer must be assigned a PCL so that it can process incoming jobs The following section describes how PCLs are assigned to printers and how this assignment can be changed or canceled If you do not specify a PCL when you set up a printer Xprint V7 0 automatically assigns to it the standard PCL GENERIC To assign a different PCL to an existing printer proceed as follows
5. 174 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering global job templates command with the exception of te job_template and sx silent execution see also the description of xpadd job in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual and the section Printing files on page 17 Defining a job template on the basis of an existing template A quick method of defining a job template is to copy an existing template and modify it as required Proceed as follows e To find out which job templates are already defined in the system and which attributes these have enter the following command xpshow jtp A list of all the existing job templates is displayed with their attributes e Now copy a suitable job template and make the required modifications xpcopy jtp old_template new_template modifications old_template represents the name of the existing template while new_template stands for the new possibly modified template The variable modifications represents a list of modifications which distinguish the new template from the old one Each entry in this list consists of an option of the xpadd jtp command and a corresponding value see also chapter Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Adding a job template on a remote host The Xprint V7 0 administrator only can also add a job template on a host other than the local host with the ah host_name option To do this proceed as follows e Log in as the Xprint V7
6. a language ca comment_for_administrator ah administration_host tm typeface_mandatory CU comment_for_user The possible values for options tp cs hm vm pq 1a depend on the PCL of the target printer The supported values can be displayed with the xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG command see section Displaying infor mation on Xprint V7 0 objects on page 82 For more detailed information refer to the description of the xpadd fnt command in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Defining a font by copying an existing font An easy way of defining a new font is to copy an existing font with the same or similar attributes If you wish you can modify the font attributes at the same time To create a new font from an existing font by modifying the attributes proceed as follows e First check whether the PCL of the target printer supports the desired attributes xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG e Then copy the existing font to the new font and make the desired modifica tions xpcopy fnt old_font_name new_font_name modifications For modifications specify what modifications you wish to make to the font Each entry in this attribute list consists of an option of the xpadd fnt command and a corresponding value Examples To define the font generic2 which is to have the typeface SansSerif the character pitch 12 cpi and the character set INTERNATIONAL xpadd fnt generic2 t
7. 190 Canceling the assignment of a recovery rule to a printer 190 Modifying recovery rules 2 220 191 Deleting arecoveryrule 2 200 0 192 Administering servers 2 208 193 Adding a server 20020200 193 Deleting a Server soca oc eR a a a 196 Changing the status of a server aoa oaa 197 Modifying the attributes ofaserver 198 Administering supervisors saosaoa a 200 Adding a supervisor aooaa 200 Activating or deactivating supervisors 203 Modifying the attributes of asupervisor 204 Deletingasupervisor 0 0 205 Interoperability 0008 207 Introduction lt s 28 napa eR ee a a 207 Accessing BSD printers aoaaa aa 209 Basic information ooa a 209 Configuring printers for BSD Xprint V7 0 aaau aaa 210 Gateways o nea a ch aoe ee ee a 213 Gateway characteristics 02 000005 213 Setting up a gateway connection 213 Gateways to BSD spoolers 4 214 Gateways to other Xprint V7 0 domains 219 Gateways to DPRINT spoolers 223 Administering gateways 0 227 Configuring an additional connection from an existing gateway 227 Deleting a gateway connection 229 Deactivatinga gateway 0 230 Activating a gateway 048 232 Obtaining information on a
8. Configuration hints When defining servers supervisors and devices in a domain a good practice is to attach the device and supervisor to a server that is local to the host controlling the device This guarantees that jobs can be submitted to the printer as soon as the host controlling the printer is up and running Unless specified otherwise this is the default situation that Xprint V7 0 will create for new devices that are added to the system A good rule of thumb is that a server should not control more than three super visors and a supervisor should not control more than fifteen devices It is important to remember this if you are using the Xprint V7 0 default as you may need to manually adjust the balance of supervisors and devices If a supervisor is moved from one server to another remember that jobs submitted to the supervisor s device s will not be automatically redirected to the new server So you should only move a supervisor when all the jobs submitted to its printers have finished printing U23841 J Z915 6 76 193 Administering servers Configuring Xprint V7 0 Procedure There are two possible ways of adding a server to the system you can either add a completely new server to the system with the xpadd srv command or you can copy an existing server with the xpcopy srv command and then modify the relevant attributes If you want to allow administrators of other hosts to assign supervisors to a new se
9. Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering filters For filter_name specify the name of the new filter You must use a name which does not yet exist in the system otherwise the command will be rejected For command you must specify the path name of the executable file of the filter program The path name must be the same on all host computers on which the filter is stored If the absolute path name is not specified the executable filter file is searched for in the directory var spool Xprint config filters If cm for command is not specified the filter program name must be identical to the filter name For input_content_type specify the formats the slow filter accepts as input The names must not exceed 63 characters in length This might be for example an existing PCL or a completely new input data format If this option is not specified the system assumes that the filter accepts any input data format With the option output_content_type you define the output data format generated by the slow filter Here too the name must not exceed 63 characters in length If you do not specify this option the system assumes that the output type is the same as the input type i e the filter does not convert data but only implements special modes With options you can specify that defined names attributes or variables are passed on to the filter program for processing The Xprint V7 0 options are mapped by strings in the following format k
10. To add a new user called brown and assign him the security level TOP_SECRET at the same time xpadd usr brown s1 TOP_SECRET To check the security level of smith xpshow usr smith di LONG A message similar to the following is displayed NAME smith Host Allowed jobs NO_LIMIT Maximum priority UNDEFINED Allowed pages NO_LIMIT Allowed copies NO_LIMIT Security level TOP_SECRET Update accounting RESET Privileges NONE Comment 142 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering permission lists 6 7 Administering permission lists Xprint V7 0 offers various means of ensuring the security of the data to be printed These include creating permission lists for printers printer groups and forms which restrict or deny use of the relevant object to the specified names Permission lists also allow other users restricted administration of supervisors for a specific server This section describes the possible measures involved in configuring permission lists The following table serves as a guide to this section If you want to Read create a permission list section Creating a permission list on page 144 modify a permission list section Modifying a permission list on page 146 delete a permission list section Deleting a permission list on page 147 grant or deny specific users access to a printer section Granting or denying specific us
11. diR With printer_group you specify exactly one printer group to be deleted If you want to delete several groups you must repeat this command for each of these printer groups If you do not specify a selection the command refers to all printer groups in the system otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer groups to be removed or you can define a list of selection criteria with the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix according to which the printer groups to be removed are selected If references to the printer group are displayed you must remove these by modifying the displayed objects such that they no longer refer to this group Delete the printer group with the following commana xpdel dgr selection If selection is not specified the command refers to all the printer groups in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer groups you want to delete or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the printer groups to be deleted are selected Examples To delete the printer group named group1 xpdel dgr groupl To delete all printer groups containing printer printers xpdel dgr scl dl printers 132 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering
12. 257 10 Appendix oo ea Gale ee dee a see i 259 Worksheets ae foe a et eae he te poke AE eee 260 Filling out the worksheet a aoaaa 261 Selection criteria list ooa aaa 266 General requirements ooo a 266 SpecialiGases seire u a ge a aoa a ye Bae NEAN a A dae BOR a 267 SNMP Agent aaua a 268 Axis box support ei uei a g a ee ee 270 TV CC integration oaa a 270 Fax and mail support aaa a 271 Glossary a so a eu brea a a a ee e a a Sets 273 Related publications a aaa aa 279 Nd X gi kee A ee eS ee a hoe a Green A eae eS 281 U23841 J Z915 6 76 1 Preface Xprint V7 0 is the output management system developed by Oc Software Laboratories Namur S A for use in heterogeneous networks It is available for many open system platforms for Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 2000 It can also interact with systems such as MS DOS MS Windows BS2000 and BSD UNIX Some limitations exists according to the platform please refer to chapter 9 Xprint V7 0 for Windows This manual describes how to install configure and use Xprint V7 0 the different chapters being designed to meet the specific requirements of different groups of users 1 1 Target groups This manual is written for the following target groups e Users If you want to print files via Xprint V7 0 as a general user this manual tells you what options are available for doing this and how to manage existing print jobs e System ad
13. Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering users With the option s1 security_level you can define the maximum security level with which a user can submit print jobs The following values are allowed UNCLASSIFIED default SENSITIVE CONFIDENTIAL SECRET TOP_SECRET Examples To modify the current privileges of smith such that he is now allowed to place his jobs at the top of the print queue TOP xpmod usr smith pv TOP To assign user smith all the possible privileges xpmod usr smith pv ALL To modify the privileges of all users with the current rights ANY_DEVICE such that these are now given all possible privileges xpmod usr scl pv ANY_DEVICE pv ALL To define a maximum priority of 80 for user smith now this user can spool in his her print jobs with any priority between 1 and 80 xpmod usr smith pr 80 To define a maximum number of 10 jobs for user smith xpmod usr smith aj 10 To restrict the maximum number of copies per print job to 15 for user smith xpmod usr smith nc 15 To restrict the maximum number of pages user smith may print to 500 xpmod usr smith ap 500 To update and save the counter for the number of pages and jobs printed by smith after the job is finished use the following commana xpmod usr smith ua 6 6 5 Deleting a user Before trying to delete a user make sure that this user is not contained in any permission list A
14. Interoperability Gateways The following figure shows the basic structure of such a gateway connection and the possibilities it offers Xprint BSD Spool Parequess Print job Print job status Resources definition Resources status Figure 14 Structure of a gateway connection Requirements Configuring a gateway to a BSD spooler in a remote system requires that an LPD spooler be active on the remote host to which the gateway connection is established U23841 J Z915 6 76 215 Gateways Interoperability Defining the local gateway The local gateway is defined as follows on a host which if possible should have a constant connection to the BSD spooler to which the connection is to be established xpadd gtw local_gw tp LOCAL ho local_host ga 515 np TCP pp BSD aa op option_list This command configures a local gateway named local_gw which administers the physical connection to the BSD system For local_gw any name can be used it does make sense however to use a name which indicates on which host the gateway is configured With the option ho local_host you specify the name of the host which is to act as the gateway to the BSD system from the local Xprint V7 0 domain The option ga 515 specifies that the port 515 is to be used for accessing the BSD print services If the BSD system uses a different port number for the print services see etc s
15. SERIAL if the printer is connected to a serial port of the computer PARALLEL if the printer is connected to a parallel port of the computer LAN if the printer is a LAN printer that is directly integrated in the network In this case the printer is not directly connected to a computer but Xprint V7 0 requires that it be monitored from one of the computers involved LAN printers also have an Internet address and a port number The Internet address can be specified directly or in form of a host name from the file etc hosts SCSI if supported by your system Depending on the port type you must then specify a device address for each printer The structure of the device address depends on the port type It specifies the special device file for the port to which the printer is connected or in the case of LAN printers via which network address and which network type the printer is addressed The following table contains a number of concrete examples of device addresses of printers Port type Device address Remark SERIAL dev term tty001 first serial port of the host dev term tty002 second serial port of the host PARALLEL dev lp0 or first parallel port of the host dev lp dev lp1 second parallel port of the host LAN 129 12 73 68 9100 Internet address and port number of a LAN printer TCP IP Ask the responsible network administrator for the Internet address of the or desired printer
16. To define a display template proceed as follows e Open the Xprint V7 0 file in your login directory e Enter the new display template as follows display_template parameter_list display_template is the name of the template under which the display template will be called with the xpshow di display_template command parameter_list represents a list of options of the xpshow job command Here you use exactly the same options as described under Displaying attributes via parameter list on the previous page Your system administrator can also define display templates These are saved in the Xprint V7 0 file in the var spool Xprint config directory This file is searched if the template is not found in your private Xprint V7 0 file p e Further display settings By means of environment variables which you set before calling the display template you can define various characteristics of the display XP_FS With this variable you define the character which is to be used to separate the horizontal fields If you do not specify a value a tab space is set by default XP_Fw This variable defines the field size in characters If you explicitly specify a value e g 10 characters the entries exceeding this length will be truncated If you specify 0 the values will not be truncated but displayed in full The default is 7 characters XP_LS With this variable you define the separator to be used to separ
17. e If you do not know the ID of the printer concerned you can display a list of all the printers defined in the system with the xpshow dev command e First check the current settings of the relevant printer s xpshow dev selection di LONG The variable selection represents either a list of the printers or the option scl selection_criteria_list used to define a list of selection criteria according to which Xprint V7 0 selects the printers For more information on selection criteria lists refer to the section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix If selection is not specified a list of all printers is displayed e If you are not sure whether the PCL you want matches the attributes of the printer or its default form or assigned font you should display the attributes of the PCL and the assigned form to compare them xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG xpshow frm form_name di LONG where pcl_name is the name of the assigned PCL and form_name is the name of the default form assigned to the printer U23841 J Z915 6 76 183 Administering PCLs Configuring Xprint V7 0 e To be able to make changes you must first deactivate the printer xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE e Now assign the new PCL to the printer xpmod dev printer pc pcl_name where printer is the ID of the printer to which the PCL is to be assigned and pcl_name is the name of the assigned PCL Note If the default PCL is re
18. of sample text This is one more line of This is sample text This mylogo is another line of sample text This is a further line of sample This is sample text This is Font used by text another line Thisjis sample text This is another line of sample text This is aifurther line of sam Text foreground ple text This is one more line ofi of sample text This is a fur ther line of sample text This is onewnore Tine of This is sample Background text This isa nother line of sam ple text This is a further line of Figure 7 Function of loadable resources 30 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options Loadable resources such as fonts logos etc can be sent to the printer separately from the document The printer will merge the data and the loadable resource to give the required printed output The resources external to the document can be defined as Xprint V7 0 objects called loadable resources They can either be predefined by the administrator for the entire system and made available to all users or they can be defined by each individual user as private loadable resources For further information on creating and using loadable resources see Chapter 4 in the Reference Manual 3 4 4 1 Using Public Loadable Resources The administrator may have configured loadable resources in the system To print a document that uses resources
19. on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the printer groups to be activated are selected The option si ON specifies the new spoolin status in this case ON for the selected printer group When si ON is set all the print requests for the selected printer groups are accepted With the option ju justification you specify a comment justifying the new spoolin status You can display this comment with the xpstat dgr command This comment is deleted automatically when the si option is changed again with the xpchange dgr command Examples Tosetthe spoolin status of the printer group group to ON with the justification that the group is now ready again xpchange dgr groupl si ON ju ready again To set the spoolin status to ON for all printer groups which contain printer printers remember that all criteria used for selecting the printer groups must be enclosed in quotes xpchange dgr scl dl printer8 si ON To activate all printer groups xpchange dgr si ON U23841 J Z915 6 76 131 Administering printer groups Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 5 6 Deleting a printer group The xpdel dgr command allows you to delete any printer group you can access In this case the individual printers of the printer group are not deleted Check first whether the printer group you wish to delete is referenced by other Xprint V7 0 objects xpshow dgr selectionlprinter_group
20. xpchange gtw GTW_hudson e Please note that the host hudson running the gateway GIW_hudson must l be a Outputware host which has openFT installed Furthermore the option op FT xxxxx must be specified when defining the partner gateway GTW_S017 DPRINT where xxxxx is the name of the FT partner in this case FT25517 The value xxxxx depends on the configuration of openFT 226 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Administering gateways 7 4 Administering gateways This section contains a brief description of the most important aspects of admin istering existing gateways The following table serves as a guide to the possible tasks involved in adminis tering gateways If you want to Read add another connection to an existing local gateway only for Xprint V7 0 administrators section Configuring an additional connection from an existing gateway on page 227 delete a gateway only for Xprint V7 0 administrators section Deleting a gateway connection on page 229 deactivate a gateway only for Xprint V7 0 administrators subroot and root section Deactivating a gateway on page 230 reactivate a gateway section Activating a gateway on page 232 obtain information on a gateway section Obtaining information on a gateway on page 233 Table 29 Administering gateways 7 4 1 existing gateway Configuring a
21. If selection is not specified all forms are modified accordingly modifications represents a list of changes to be made to the selected form s Each entry in this modifications list consists of one of the options of the xpadd frm command listed in section Adding a form on page 157 anda corresponding value Examples To modify the attributes of the form forml such that the form layup is set to landscape format and the default font to font1 xpmod frm forml 1s LANDSCAPE ft fontl To modify the paper format of all forms with the setting A4 297 mm x 210 mm to Legal 14 inch x 8 5 inch xpmod frm scl ph 297m pw 210 ph 147 pw 8 5i 6 9 4 Default forms for printers Xprint V7 0 allows you to assign a default form to every printer This default form is then used automatically unless a different form is specified at spoolin If you do not specify a default form when setting up a printer Xprint V7 0 automatically uses the default form GENERIC on this device To assign a default form to a printer or to change a default form that has already been assigned proceed as follows 160 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering forms f you do not know the printer identifier of the relevant printer display a list of all the printers with the xpshow dev command e First check the settings of the relevant printer xpshow dev printer di LONG A list of all the settings for the specified prin
22. See the following figure for your options XPRINT SYSTEM fi USER i XPG emulation menu interface application C command interface Figure 3 User s options The various interfaces offer you the following options e The menu interface allows you to perform all actions via a graphical user interface e Using the command line interface you can perform all actions by entering Xprint V7 0 commands e The XPG emulation allows the use of the X Open commands 1p Ipstat cancel U23841 J Z915 6 76 7 Mercator Introduction to Xprint V7 0 e The application programming interface API enables applications to access the Xprint V7 0 system via C function calls 2 2 Mercator Mercator is the graphical user interface for Xprint V7 0 It allows the adminis trator to have easy access to Host Devices Device groups and Job properties It also provides a quick overview of what is happening in the whole print domain or a subset of it One can interface Mercator with several third party viewers in order to preview the pcl or PostScript files to print Windows platforms only The User Guide gives you an introduction to the product For more detailed information see the online help which is available for each window 2 3 Xprint V7 0 R 3 kit Xprint V7 0 can be optimally interfaced with SAP R 3 V4 x and has been certified by SAP as an Output Management System cer
23. The section Administering filters on page 162 contains information on how to set up a fast filter Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter before printing the jobs If this is the case check if the relevant filter is already available in the Xprint V7 0 system The section Administering filters on page 162 contains information on how to set up a fast filter If you have checked all the points listed above and if all the options to be used are compatible with the printer s PCL you should not have any problems in adding the printer You can find a list of the predefined PCLs in the appendix of the Reference Manual U23841 J Z915 6 76 265 Selection criteria lists Appendix Selection criteria list General requirements In many cases you will directly enter specific names for your operations However there may be times when you will want to apply changes for example to several users with the same privileges or you might not know the exact name In such cases you can use specific criteria to select all the objects corre sponding to these criteria These criteria are specified in what is called the selection criteria list in general these are the same options as you use with the xpadd command when you add an object to the Xprint V7 0 system for the first time This option has the following format SCl selection_criteria_list When specifying a selection criteria list you must observe the follow
24. This means that first your Xprint file is searched for private loadable resoures If none can be found or the Xprint file does not exist or the Xprint file is not readable then the resource is assumed to be a public loadable resource 32 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options For inter domain printing resources are assumed to be available in the remote domain This restricts resources to public ones 3 4 5 Copying print files before printing and deleting them after printing The basic command xpadd dr file prints the specified file by adding to the job queue a reference to the original file If there is some time between job submission and the actual printing any changes made to the document during this time also affect the printout This is not always desirable For this reason Xprint V7 0 allows you to make a copy of the data to be printed This can be done using the following option cp cp stands for copy file This option causes a copy to be made of the document to be printed This way the original file can immediately be edited further or can be deleted without these modifications affecting the printout Another option causes a file to be deleted immediately after printing rm rm stands for remove file after printing This option causes all the specified files to be deleted after the printout If the printout is not finished for example due to an error or because the jo
25. but you can only redirect the entire print queue of a printer not individual print jobs This redirection is permanent i e it also applies to all subsequent jobs for the original printer and must be canceled explicitly Please note that xprdir is provided for compatibility purpose only You should use xpchange dev rd instead xprdir assigns to the original printer the status NOT_ACTIVE and activates the printer which is to be the new destination The active job on the original printer is handled as specified with the j option by the user Then the entire print queue is redirected from the old printer to the new destination all the print jobs keeping their original status e The xprdir command can be used by every user no specific privileges l are required If the Xprint V7 0 administrator wants to restrict its use he she can protect the command by means of access rights and user definitions e To redirect the print jobs of one printer to another enter the following command xprdir d old_destination r new_destination Coptions d old_destination specifies the printer whose job queue is to be redirected to another printer r new_destination specifies the printer to which the job queue of the original printer is to be redirected e The device names specified with d and r must not be identical 1 For options the following options are possible j job_handling requests Xprint V7 0 to
26. by modifying the relevant objects such that the refer ences are canceled e Check if the printer to be deleted is still active with the following command xpstat dev selection e Ifthe printer is still active output State ACTIVE you must deactivate it before deleting it xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE e Delete the printer definition with the following command xpdel dev selection U23841 J Z915 6 76 121 Administering devices Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 4 5 Reconnecting a printer to another system To move a printer from one system to another use the following procedure Deactivate the relevant printer xpchange dev printer_name st NOT_ACTIVE where printer_name represents the name of the printer to be reconnected Specify the host to which the printer is to be connected xpmod dev printer_name ho new_host da device_file For new_host specify the name of the host at which the printer is to be available from now on If the printer is no longer connected to the same port e g dev 1p0 instead of dev 1p specify a new file for device_file Reactivate the printer xpchange dev device_name 6 4 6 Reconnecting a printer to a different port If you want to connect a defined printer to a different port on the same system you only need to modify the device definition you do not have to delete and redefine the printer Check whether the relevant printer is still active Use the followin
27. e g if the font my_font is used in the form my_form Examples To delete the fonts font1 font2 and font3 from the system xpdel fnt fontl font2 font3 To delete all fonts with the attributes character style ITALICS and print quality DRAFT xpdel fnt scl cs ITALICS pq DRAFT 154 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering fonts 6 8 3 Modifying the attributes of a font You can modify the attributes of any defined font you administer The default font GENERIC supplied with Xprint V7 0 cannot be modified even by the Xprint V7 0 administrator e Tobe on the safe side first display the attributes of the font you want to modify To do this use the xpshow fnt command see section Displaying information on Xprint V7 0 objects on page 82 e To modify the attributes of specific fonts enter the following command xpmod fnt selection modifications For selection you can either specify a list of fonts whose attributes you want to modify or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant fonts are selected If you do not specify selection all fonts are modified modifications represents a list of modifications to be made to the font s Each entry in this list consists of one of the options of the xpadd fnt command listed in the section Adding a font
28. messages in English and German To select the desired language for the Xprint V7 0 system the shell variable LANG should be set to the correct value En or De In addition the complete path of the directory holding the Xprint V7 0 message files var spool Xprint config MSG 1 N cat should be entered in the shell variable NLSPATH 236 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Installing Xprint V7 0 Installation new 8 4 Installation new Xprint V7 0 is delivered on a data medium CD ROM or magnetic tape cartridge which contains several packages Depending on the platform two installation procedures are possible pkgadd and cpio The following figure provides an overview of the installation process Installation of Xprint with cpio or pkgadd pkgadd DBinstal pkgadd xpstart xpadd hos host2 DBinstall xpstart Figure 17 Installation procedures U23841 J Z915 6 76 237 Installation new Installing Xprint V7 0 g 8 4 1 Installing with cpio To install Xprint V7 0 you require a minimum of 15 megabytes free storage space Also the Xprint V7 0 database requires additional storage space the size of which directly depends on the contents of the database the number of servers printers PCLs etc To install the Xprint V7 0 software proceed as follows e login as root change to the tmp directory and enter the following com
29. output devices 5 output management system 1 8 P pages print several copies 35 select for printing 21 parasite host 99 106 U23841 J Z915 6 76 283 Index partner gateway 214 PCL 152 179 add 180 add from remote host 180 assign comment 182 define 185 delete 181 GENERIC 179 name 180 PCL printer capability list 163 permanent ID 50 permission lists 12 75 port 117 print directly 37 documents 17 double sided 28 job identifier 50 notification of result 36 parts of adocument 21 select files 17 several copies 35 use job template 44 using forms 41 via gateway 19 print job default identifier 49 delete 65 global identifier 49 identifier 50 local identifier 49 maximum number 136 add to printer group 129 assign default form 160 assign filter to 169 assign security level 124 change port 122 configure 117 deactivate 118 display 117 display status 121 grant access 148 move 122 port 117 remove 121 remove filter 170 remove from printer group 129 replace 123 printer capability list PCL 152 163 printer group 126 activate 131 copy 128 deactivate 130 delete 132 grant access 149 name 127 remove printer 129 setup 127 printer port 117 change 122 private loadable resources 32 privileges 252 public loadable resources 31 modify after submission 61 R priority 136 R 3 kit 8 redirect 61 redirect redirect to another printer 61 print job 61 select 49 REFERENCED_BY 83 status 37 38 remove print q
30. spooler system of Berkeley BSD UNIX systems allow users of the local Xprint V7 0 domain to access the printers and printer groups in these spooler systems Vice versa it is also possible to access the printers and printer groups of the local Xprint V7 0 domain from DPRINT and BSD spooler systems This allows a network spooler system to be configured in a heterogeneous network You can also assign a permission list to a gateway This makes it possible to restrict use of remote resources for local users e Connections to BS2000 systems via gateways require the local l gateway to be defined on a UNIX platform on which openFT is installed As an administrator you can set up delete modify and enable or disable gateways in both directions e Hosts hos Under Xprint V7 0 the term host refers to every computer defined in an Xprint V7 0 domain Hosts are divided into different classes master slave and parasite hosts The difference lies in the way they handle the Xprint V7 0 database The Xprint V7 0 database contains all the data Xprint V7 0 needs to access Xprint V7 0 resources This includes information on the defined hosts users printers and printer groups as well on forms and all other Xprint V7 0 objects Only the print jobs are stored on the server which is responsible for their execution A master host holds a complete copy of this database At any one time one of the potential master hosts is the active mas
31. 0 Reference Manual U23841 J Z915 6 76 127 Administering printer groups Configuring Xprint V7 0 Copying a printer group If you want to set up a printer group which is very similar to an existing one you can also copy the existing printer group and modify the copied group according to your requirements The new printer group is set up on the host on which the xpcopy dgr command is executed this is not true if you have specified a different host with the ah administration host option Copy a printer group with the following command xpcopy dgr source_group target_group modifications With source_group you specify the name of the printer group you want to copy With target_group you must specify the name of the new printer group If this name already exists for a printer or a printer group the xpcopy dgr command is rejected For modifications you specify a list containing the new or changed values for the new printer group The options in this list correspond to the options with which the printer group was added to the Xprint V7 0 system see the previous section Examples To set up the printer group group1 which contains the printers printerl1 printer2 and printer3 and is only to be used by the users in the permission list permission1 xpadd dgr groupl d1 printerl printer2 printer3 up permissionl To set up a new group group2 based on the existing group group1 without making any changes xpc
32. 0 differentiates between automatic and manual forms Jobs using automatic forms can be printed at any time these forms are mounted on 10 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to Xprint V7 0 Xprint V7 0 elements the printer by default and usually only define the hopper or the page format margins or the font If a specific form requires that special paper be mounted in the printer manually or that a font cassette be changed a manual form makes sure that the job is only printed when the printer has been prepared e PCLs pcl PCLs printer capability lists are used to define what printing options a device provides Furthermore the PCL contains information on how the options specified when the job is submitted can be converted to device commands Xprint V7 0 is supplied with a number of PCLs for the most common printers and with one generic PCL which in most cases also allows printing on unknown devices A list of all the PCLs supported by Xprint V7 0 is provided in the Reference Manual e Users usr Xprint V7 0 differentiates between two types of user there are users who are not defined in the Xprint V7 0 system and Xprint V7 0 users who are defined in the Xprint V7 0 system users are all users of the system on which Xprint V7 0 is running the default settings for Xprint V7 0 apply to them If these settings are not sufficient the users can be defined in the Xprint V7 0 system The administrator can make more settings
33. 0 objects to the database thus making them known in the Xprint V7 0 system Only print jobs job are not entered in the database but are added to the print queue administered by the corresponding server The xpadd command may be called for all Xprint V7 0 objects with the exception of the Xprint V7 0 system itself sys For a detailed description of using this command for each object type see the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual When you add an object to the database with the xpadd command the following rules apply Asan Xprint V7 0 administrator you can add any objects you choose and can define any administration hosts for them by specifying a host other than the local host with the ah host option or for printers and gateways with the ho host option The object you add can then be administered by yourself as well as by the system administrator and the local Xprint V7 0 administrators of this host As a system or local Xprint V7 0 administrator you can define objects only for your local host Every Xprint V7 0 object needs a unique name in the Xprint V7 0 system This name should enable users of this object to identify it For Xprint V7 0 internal objects like servers and supervisors it makes sense to use the name of the host on which these objects are defined For printers a unique name indicating their location is a good choice and for job templates forms and fonts it is advisable to use names indicating their purpos
34. 6 76 Managing print jobs Selecting a print job The permanent job identifier The permanent job identifier is usable in the same way as the local job id in the PRISMAnet domain A new key has been integrated in the job structure to garantee the permanence of the job identifier which means it will never be assigned to another job The permanent job identifier format is H C L Where H is the client host name to make the permanent id single in a domain is the first separator character C is a counter of 10 digits it will never be reset is the second separator character L is the local job id It will be possible to select a job with a permanent job id in the following commands xpchange xpdel xpmod xpshow xpstat When a job is submitted Xprint V7 0 displays the permanent id or the local job id if the value of the extended option of xpadd or whether the environment variable XP_SHOW_PERMANENT_ID is set to 1 Example xpadd de device dr filename ex XP_SHOW_PERMANENT_ID 1 XP000002 Job lt d241s081 0000000245 1 gt lt d241s081 8 gt added Or XP_SHOW_PERMANENT_ID 1 export XP_SHOW_PERMANENT_ID xpadd de device dr filename U23841 J Z915 6 76 51 Selecting a print job Managing print jobs XP000002 Job lt d241s081 0000000245 1 gt lt d241s081 8 gt added The permanent job id is only usable locally on the submission host as it is the case with the loca
35. A physical printer can then be defined with the same logical name in each network A user can then access the printer by using this name from any host in the system Procedure Once at least the primary master host is defined you can add all the other systems to Xprint V7 0 The order in which you configure them also determines the order of the host hierarchy If one computer is entered after another computer it also ranks below this one in the hierarchy see section Xprint V7 0 objects on page 9 To add a new host to the Xprint V7 0 configuration you must perform steps on both the active host and the host to be added First the new host must be regis tered in the existing Xprint V7 0 configuration then it can import the Xprint V7 0 database and become part of the Xprint V7 0 network To configure a new host proceed as follows e Log into an active host If the Xprint V7 0 administrator is defined as a user there log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator otherwise as root e Enter the following command to add the new host to the database xpadd hos host_name re host_type sh supporting_host where host_name is the name of the relevant host and host_type the value you have entered in the worksheet The option re host_type re stands for responsibility may be omitted for potential masters If the value PARASITE is specified for host_type the value supporting_host for sh specifies on which system the database for this parasit
36. J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Administrative tasks under Xprint 5 3 3 Modifying Xprint V7 0 objects With the xpmod command you can modify the static attributes of all Xprint V7 0 objects Dynamic attributes such as the printer status or the status of the current print quotas of a user can be changed with the xpchange command see the following section Changing the status of Xprint V7 0 objects on page 82 The Xprint V7 0 administrator can modify all objects in the system while the system and local Xprint V7 0 administrators can only modify those objects which are administered on their local host For a detailed description of using this command for each object type see the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual The following rules apply for modifying objects Printers dev gateways gtw servers srv and supervisors spv must be deactivated before they can be modified If necessary this can be checked with the xpstat command see section Displaying the status of an Xprint V7 0 object on page 82 If an object to be deleted is still active it must be deactivated with the xpchange command used with the option st NOT_ACTIVE see section Changing the status of Xprint V7 0 objects on page 82 Remember to reactivate the object after modifying it Basically you can use any option which can also be used when adding the object However there are a few special cases which a
37. J Z915 6 76 5 Xprint V7 0 from the user s point of view Introduction to Xprint V7 0 case that you are unable to access some of the visible output devices because you have not been granted the necessary rights to use them There may also be groups of output devices available These device groups combine several output devices to provide quicker spoolout When printed via a device group the print jobs are distributed evenly over the devices in the group so that jobs can be processed quickly even at times of high print load Ina network Xprint V7 0 is completely transparent This means that it does not matter whether an output device is connected to your host or to another host in the network You can use the output devices just as if they were connected directly to your host It is even possible to send print jobs to output devices outside your own Xprint V7 0 domain provided that the required gateways are configured In addition to the devices of other Xprint V7 0 domains you can also use devices which are not connected to the Xprint V7 0 of a system but to a computer running BSD UNIX MS DOS MS Windows or BS2000 see the following figure Mainframe Sah BS2000 es DOS Windows Figure 2 Using Xprint V7 0 6 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to Xprint V7 0 Xprint V7 0 from the user s point of view As an Xprint V7 0 user you can also decide which interface you want to use on your system
38. Outputware commands to be entered Under Outputware such a prompt might look like this xprintadm nashua home peter This example shows a prompt which gives the name of the user xprintadm and the name of the host on which the user is logged in nashua in paren theses This is followed by the current directory 276 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Glossary Raw mode When a print job is spooled in in raw mode Xprint V7 0 sends this file to the specified printer without any formatting or processing by a filter Recovery rule Recovery rules are used to define the error recovery procedure in the case of specific printer conditions SCSI driver The SCSI peripheral driver communicates with the SCSI host adapter server instead of directly with the hardware It contains entry point routines to pass user level request to open and close the device or to read and write data The SCSI peripheral driver populates a request structure with this infor mation then passes the information to the SCSI host adapter driver The host adapter driver handles the direct communication with the hardware Server Servers are the Xprint V7 0 objects which administer incoming print jobs and are responsible for scheduling them Every server manages its own print queue which contains all the print jobs for the printers whose supervisors the server controls Slave host A slave host is a host which holds a complete copy of the Xprint V7 0 database but can
39. PORTRAIT AUTOMATIC LETTER COURIER PORTRAIT perml AUTOMATIC A5LAND GENERIC LANDSCAPE MANUAL ANUAL GENERIC LANDSCAPE MANUAL Forms with the value MANUAL in the Mount method column require specific manual settings to be made e g mounting the correct paper see section Printing a document with a MANUAL form on page 41 p o To print a document using the form LETTER xpadd dr filel fm LETTER To print a document via the form A5LAND but using the font COURIER xpadd dr filel fm ASLAND ft COURIER To print the document filel on the printer printer1 with the manual form ADSLAND xpadd job dr filel de printerl fm A5LAND The user mounts the required form xpmount The following menu query is displayed Please select the manual form to mount on the device Selection 0 Unmount the form 1 manual 2 A5LAND Type number or for help Input 2 Form A5LAND has been selected Please select the device where the form A5LAND will be mounted 42 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using other Xprint V7 0 objects Selection 1 printerl 2 printer2 3 printer3 Type number or for help Input 1 Device printerl has been selected Please mount A5LAND on device printerl Type y when finished or for help Input y Form A5LAND is now mounted on device printerl The printer now starts printing the document fi lel
40. To make a newly defined recovery rule effective for a printer you must assign it to the printer Proceed as follows e lf the printer is still active deactivate it xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE where selection is either the name of one or more printers or a selection criteria list according to which the printers are selected e Now you can assign the new recovery rules to an existing printer with the following command xpmod dev selection rr rule_name This command assigns the recovery rules rule_name to the selected printer s The option rr rule_name can also be specified immediately when a new printer is defined e Now you can reactivate the printers xpchange dev selection Example Assigning a recovery rule Standard to all printers in the system xpchange dev st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod dev rr Standard xpchange dev 6 14 3 Canceling the assignment of a recovery rule to a printer To cancel the assignment of a recovery rule set to a printer because you want to reactivate the system s default error recovery proceed as follows e Ifthe printer is still active deactivate it xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE where selection is either a list of printers to be deactivated or a selection criteria list via which the printers are selected If selection is not specified all printers are deactivated 190 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering recovery rules You can cance
41. UNCLASSIFIED Submission time Wed Aug 30 16 44 04 MET 1995 Submission host nile Print after Wed Aug 30 16 44 04 MET 1995 Retention time Retention period 0 Remove RESET File s copied RESET FF mode Wait activation RESET Wrap mode NONE Tab space 08 Raw printing RESET Hopper number 00 Output bin 00 First page behaviour RESET Loaded files ap table Content type COMPATIBLE No filter RESET Special print modes otification events NONE Delivery method MAIL Delivery descriptor Delivery address Slow filters Submitted command xpadd de printerl dr etc passwd Extended options Comment 54 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Managing print jobs Displaying print jobs 4 2 Displaying print jobs You can display individual or all print jobs in the print queue Information on your print jobs can be obtained with the commands xpshow and xpstat which also allow you to view the status of your print jobs e The xpshow and xpstat commands can be used to display the attributes l of all objects in Xprint V7 0 Therefore the following applies not only to print jobs but to all Xprint V7 0 objects xpshow provides all the static attributes of objects i e those which are not modified by the Xprint V7 0 system itself while xpstat provides information on the dynamic criteria The two corresponding commands xpmod and xpchange can be used to modify or change the settings of Xprint V7 0 objects xpmod modifies the st
42. V7 0 on the primary master host and define a user ID for the Xprint V7 0 administrator configure the other systems in the network by adding them to the existing network Then you or the respective system administrators must configure the individual printers by adding them to the Xprint V7 0 configuration U23841 J Z915 6 76 103 Administering hosts users only Configuring Xprint V7 0 This section of the chapter deals with the first three items in this list How to configure the other computers and printers in the network is described in separate sections later in this chapter Determining the network structure So that Xprint V7 0 can be introduced into an existing network without problems you must study the network structure before configuring Xprint V7 0 For this purpose you must gain an overview of all the computers and printers in this network You should gather data on every computer and printer This data will be required for configuring Xprint V7 0 The Appendix contains a worksheet in which you can enter the relevant data It is recommended that you make a copy of this worksheet for every computer in your network and fill it out carefully If there is not enough space for the relevant printers and or supervisors use the back of the copy or an additional sheet which you should clip to the worksheet Configuring the primary master host When you have installed Xprint V7 0 on the host which is to be the primary mas
43. XP_FW 0 U23841 J Z915 6 76 59 Displaying print jobs Managing print jobs XP_FS export XP_FW XP_FS To use the display settings of the previous example only once for a display with my_temp1ate XP_FW 0 XP_FS xpshow job di my_template 60 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Managing print jobs Modifying a submitted print job 4 3 Modifying a submitted print job When a print job is submitted you can still modify its attributes as long as the job has not yet been printed You can for example redirect a print job to another printer or select a different form You can also redirect a print job to a remote domain e To change the attributes of a submitted job you can use the xpmod command xpmod job job modifications For job you can specify either a job identifier or a selection criteria list If you omit job all the existing print jobs are modified For modifications you can use all the xpadd options except for dr jt cp ct rm te dp st nv sc sm and nf Options can be set or reset to the default by appending the suffixes or There are two possible ways of redirecting print jobs to another printer You can either use the xpmod job command and the de printer option or you can use the xprdir command Using this command you can specify the required values old printer new printer jobs etc either explicitly or via an Xprint V7 0 driven menu query For more inform
44. Xprint V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 3 4 8 Requesting notification of the result Xprint V7 0 allows you to have a message about the result of a print job sent to you This is particularly useful if the period of time between the job s submission and its execution is fairly long e g in the case of scheduled print jobs and jobs with a low priority For this purpose Xprint V7 0 provides several options for the xpadd command eV events With this option you can specify the events of which you want to be notified Possible events are ALL DEVICE_ERROR MOUNTING and NONE The default is NONE for local jobs or REJECTED_FROM_REMOTE_DOMAIN if the job was sent via a gateway or ALL if either of the options nm or na is specified Further settings are STARTED COMPLETED ABORTED SUSPEND RESUMED DEVICE_ERROR USER_ERROR MODIDFIED and SENT_TO_REMOTE_DOMAIN a detailed description of these keywords is given in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual nM notification_method With this option you can specify how you want to be notified The default is MAIL other possible settings are WRITE COMMAND and FILE see the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual for details na notification_address With this option you specify where the message is to be delivered nd comment nd stands for notification descriptor Allows you to define a comment that is to be added to the message Examples To request a message to be se
45. Xprint V7 0 with the xpstart command on his her local host Every host must be started individually with this command When you start your local host the following objects are activated automatically all the local servers belonging to this host all the local printers and the associated supervisors belonging to this host It must be possible to activate the printers automatically see the xpadd dev aa command and they must be controlled by active servers on the local host all the remote printers and supervisors belonging to this host provided the printers can be started automatically and are controlled by active servers on the local host U23841 J Z915 6 76 85 Administrative tasks under Xprint Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 When starting Xprint V7 0 you can also specify whether jobs which were not finished in a previous session are to be retained setting WARM default or deleted setting COLD Such a setting is useful for example if you shut down your system while there were still print jobs on it with the status ACTIVE or jobs still in the print queue After a WARM start these print jobs are processed again e Start Xprint V7 0 with the following command xpstart sa system_activation For system_activation specify either WARM or COLD If you do not specify a value WARM will be used Stopping Xprint V7 0 With the xpstop command the system administrator root and the Xprint V7 0 adm
46. Z915 6 76 67 Responsibilities Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 A local Xprint V7 0 administrator has the same privileges as the system administrator see below except for starting Xprint V7 0 and defining local Xprint V7 0 administrators e Xprint V7 0 administrator The Xprint V7 0 administrator has absolute control over the Xprint V7 0 system throughout an entire Xprint V7 0 domain i e over all the systems defined in the Xprint V7 0 database He she can administer Xprint V7 0 from any of these hosts provided he she is registered as a user of this host The only exception is starting Xprint V7 0 on a remote system that is exclusively controlled by the local system administrator of that system The following figure illustrates the privileges of the different types of user with respect to administering Xprint V7 0 Xprint administrator System administrator Local Xprint administrator Xprint administrator Xprint administrator System administrator Local Xprint administrator Figure 9 User privileges This figure shows an example of a configuration of four hosts A to D and the two printers 1 and 2 The Xprint V7 0 administrator is registered as a user on all hosts and can therefore control the various objects of the Xprint V7 0 system from every host In the figure the Xprint V7 0 administrator can administer all the Xprint V7 0 objects in the X
47. a file with the PCL definition This file must have a special structure The section Format of a PCL definition in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual contains a description of the required format A Only users with a sound knowledge of printers should define PCLs themselves It is seriously recommended that you copy an existing PCL entry in the file xpterm and then adjust it to the functions and require ments of the new printer U23841 J Z915 6 76 185 Administering recovery rules Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 14 Administering recovery rules This section describes how to define and administer recovery rules The following table serves as a guide to this section If you want to Read define a new recovery rule section Defining a recovery rule on page 186 assign a recovery rule to a printer section Assigning a recovery rule toa printer on page 190 cancel the assignment of a recovery rule to a printer section Canceling the assignment of a recovery rule to a printer on page 190 modify a recovery rule section Modifying recovery rules on page 191 delete a recovery rule section Deleting a recovery rule on page 192 Table 22 Administering recovery rules 6 14 1 Defining a recovery rule Recovery rules are defined in a file using a text editor This file is compiled when it is added to the Xprint V7 0 system This section describ
48. are selected Examples To delete the filter LandA2 from the system xpdel flt LandA2 To delete all filters with the input data format POSTSCRIPT xpdel flt scl it POSTSCRIPT U23841 J Z915 6 76 167 Administering filters Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 10 3 Modifying the attributes of a filter With the xpmod f1t command you can modify the attributes of any filter you administer This may be useful if the filter is to be administered from another host or if you want the filter to be accessible on more hosts than were defined before e Enter the following command xpmod flt selection modifications For selection you can either specify a list of filters you want to modify or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant filters are selected If you do not specify selection all filters are modified For modifications specify the values you want to modify or add The options correspond to the options that can be used when adding a filter to the Xprint V7 0 system There is however the following restriction The option tp filter_type cannot be modified with the xpmod f1t command Examples To make the filter LandA2 available also on the hosts colorado and nile xpmod flt LandA2 ho colorado nile You want to modify all filters supporting POSTSCRIPT so that they a
49. assigned to a printer if all the other printer options are compatible Example A printer is defined via pc HP_LASERJET and the default form LANDSCAPE 1 s LANDSCAPE In this case you can only modify the printer to EPSON FX with the pc option if you first modify the default form to PORTRAIT 6 4 8 Assigning a security level to a printer Under Xprint V7 0 one of five security levels can be assigned to printers as well as to print jobs and users Xprint V7 0 assigns print jobs to a printer according to the security level of the job and the printer This means that a print job can only be printed on a printer with at least the same security level A print job with the security level CONFIDENTIAL for example can only be printed on printers with the security level CONFIDENTIAL or higher SECRET TOP_SECRET Log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator If required deactivate the printer xpchange dev printer_name st NOT_ACTIVE ju justification For printer_name specify the name of the printer whose security level you want to modify With the ju justification option you can define a comment justifying the new security level This comment can be displayed with the xpstat dev command The comment is automatically deleted when the st option is changed again with the xpchange dev command To assign a specific security level to a printer use the following command xpmod dev selection s1 security_level 124 U23841 J Z
50. denied list user_list is a list of Xprint V7 0 users or forms which are to be included in the permission list For forms this list need only contain the names of the forms while for Xprint V7 0 users it may contain the following elements user The user user on the host containing the object to which this permission list is to be assigned E All users on the host containing the object to which the permission list is to be assigned user host_name The user user on host host_name user The user user on each host host_name All users on host host_name All users on all hosts You can also specify several elements These must then be separated by a blank or tab 144 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering permission lists If you want to create a list of forms you must additionally specify the option pt FORM pt permission type comment is an optional comment describing the permission list Comments can make using these permission lists later much easier If a comment contains blanks it must be enclosed in double quotes Copying a permission list To use an existing permission list as the basis for a similar new list copy the existing list and modify the entries at the same time or immediately afterwards Use the following procedure e Log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator e f necessary check the existing permission lists xpshow prm di LONG A list of all the available
51. devices with the XON protocol xpdel dev scl po XON Special cases This section describes all the xpadd options which are not available as criteria or which are available additionally All objects Except with job hos and usr you can additionally use the option ad This option is used to select the objects which are assigned to an existing admin istrator Printers With the st option you can select all the devices with a specific status this can be ACTIVE or NOT_ACTIVE With the si option you can select devices with a specific spoolin state possible values are ON or OFF With the so option you can select devices with a specific spoolout state possible values are ON or OFF With the rd option for redirection you can select devices with automatic redirection to a specific printer Printer groups With the si option you can select device groups with a specific spoolin state possible values are ON or OFF Print jobs With the jo option you can display the jobs assigned to a specific job origi nator With the st option you can select jobs with a specific job status The following values are possible ACTIVE WAIT TOP SUSPEND DATA_FILTERING SCHEDULED INTERRUPTED and TERMINATED U23841 J Z915 6 76 267 SNMP Agent Appendix You can use the i k option to select jobs with a specific status by means of a keyword e g NOT_ACTIVE see xpstat job The
52. dgr 128 xpcopy flt 166 xpcopy fnt 153 xpcopy frm 158 xpcopy jtp 175 176 xpcopy Irs 172 xpcopy srv 201 xpdel command 80 xpdel dev 121 xpdel dgr 132 xpdel flt 167 xpdel fnt 154 xpdel frm 159 xpdel job 65 xpdel jtp 177 xpdel Irs 173 286 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Index xpdel pcl 181 option diLONG 152 xpdel spv 205 option di REFERENCED_BY 83 xpdel srv 197 option frm 42 xpmod option jtp 45 option ad 98 102 105 xpshow dev 123 option aj 136 xpshow flt 166 option ap 136 xpshow fnt 157 option cu 182 xpshow Irs 31 172 173 option da 122 xpshow pcl 152 157 183 option dl 129 xpshow srv 116 option dl 129 xpshow usr 140 option fl 169 xpstart 101 option fl 170 xpstat 82 option fm 161 xpstat dev 121 169 option ho 135 xpstat srv 196 option ho 134 xpstat usr 140 option nc 136 option pc 184 option pr 136 option pv 136 option sl 137 option ua 136 xpmod command 81 xpmod dev 122 123 161 169 170 184 xpmod dgr 129 xpmod flt 168 xpmod fnt 155 xpmod frm 160 xpmod job 61 xpmod jtp 178 xpmod srv 199 xpmod sys 98 102 105 xpmod usr 134 135 xpmount 41 option d 41 option f 41 option s 41 xppatch errormessages 103 option dg 103 xprdir 61 xpsetuser 256 xpshow 82 U23841 J Z915 6 76 287 Fujitsu Siemens Computers GmbH User Documentation 33094 Paderborn Germany Fax 49 700 372 00001 email manuals fujitsu siemens com http manuals
53. fast filter bsd is not sufficient In this case a gateway connection must be established see section Gateways on page 213 7 2 2 Configuring printers for BSD Xprint V7 0 If you want to provide access to a BSD printer you must first define the fast filter bsd in the system and then assign it to a local printer configured specially for this purpose This local pseudo printer then acts as a substitute for the real BSD printer As soon as it receives a job it passes it on to the specified BSD printer spooler where the job will later be printed Proceed as follows 210 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Accessing BSD printers g e Make sure the fast filter bsd is already configured xpshow flt If the filter bsd is not displayed you must first add it to the system the filter is supplied with Xprint V7 0 Enter the following command xpadd flt bsd tp FAST cm bsd op LOGIN PRINTER DOC REF COMMENT TITLE e Define the printer as you would a local printer at the same time assigning to it the filter bsd xpadd dev bsd_printer da pseudo_file f1 bsd ca queue remote_printer host host_name pc pcl aa For bsd_printer specify a unique name under which the BSD printer is to be known in the Xprint V7 0 domain For pseudo_file specify any file name of an empty file instead of a real printer address This file is required to control access to the print queue it does not have anyth
54. fast filters have been written to allow Xprint V7 0 to submit job to printer attached to an axis box and to have a follow up of the printer status i e Printer Off Paper End These filters are implemented via programs respectively called prosbsd for the axis firmware lt 5 20 and prosbsd6 for axis firmware gt 6 0 The axis box having a firmware version comprised between 5 20 and 6 0 are not currently supported by Xprint V7 0 It is suggested to upgrade the axis box firmware to a version 6 0 Configuration The configuration is detailed in the reference guide appendix TV CC integration When installing the package Slsplgu on a platform where Transview Control Center product is installed package TV CCA at least version 3 1A Xprint V7 0 is automatically integrated in TV CCA Such integration allows the monitoring of Xprint V7 0 printers any printer error will be intercepted by TV CC that may initiate a reaction via the Xprint V7 0 graphical interface 270 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Appendix Fax and mail support Fax and mail support Xprint V7 0 fax and mail support is available on the Unix platforms The fax mail software supported by Xprint V7 0 as well as the versions and the platforms on which the fax mail solution is certified are given in the following Even if not listed other versions or platforms may be compatible with Xprint V7 0 VSI FAX version 3 5 2 on SCO UNIX Optio FaxFX version 2 54 on SC
55. fi var spool Xprint config pcl xpterm To add your own PCL SELFDEFINED which is located in the file xprint50 pcl_alternative sel fdef_hp1j to the system xpadd pcl SELFDEFINED fi xprint50 pcl_alternative sel fdef_hplj 180 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering PCLs To add the PCL HP LASERJET from the file hp1j in the directory var spool Xprint config PCL to the remote host nashua xpadd pcl HP LASERJET ho nashua fi hplj 6 13 2 Deleting a PCL Under Xprint V7 0 you can delete from the Xprint V7 0 system any PCL you administer Note A PCL referenced by another object cannot be deleted from the system This applies for example to a PCL which is assigned to a printer in the system e Check if the PCL to be deleted has any references to other objects xpshow pcl L selectionlpcl_name diR For pcl_name you specify the name of exactly one PCL you want to delete If you want to want to delete several PCLs you must repeat this command for each one For selection you can either specify a list of PCL names or you can define a list of selection criteria with the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix according to which the PCLs to be deleted are selected e f references to the PCL are displayed you must remove these by modifying the displayed objects accordingly e To delete a PCL from the system
56. first two and the last step are not of interest if you configure Xprint V7 0 on a stand alone host The fourth step is discussed in the section Configuring a new host on page 98 Determining the network structure So that Xprint V7 0 can be introduced into an existing network without problems you must study the network structure before configuring Xprint V7 0 For this purpose you must gain an overview of all the computers and printers in this network You should gather data on every computer and printer This data will be required for configuring Xprint V7 0 The Appendix contains a worksheet in which you can enter the relevant data It is recommended that you make a copy of this worksheet for every computer in your network and fill it out carefully If there is not enough space for the relevant printers and or supervisors use the back of the copy or an additional sheet which you should clip to the worksheet Configuring the primary master host When you have installed Xprint V7 0 on the host which is to be the primary master host you can start configuring Xprint V7 0 by preparing the selected system as follows e Log into the selected system as root e Configure the network services for the communication with Xprint V7 0 etc services file see section Configuring the local area network LAN on page 235 U23841 J Z915 6 76 97 Administering hosts Configuring Xprint V7 0 e lf the database was not installed in
57. guide to this section If you want to Read add a font section Adding a font on page 152 delete a font section Deleting a font on page 154 modify the attributes of a font section Modifying the attributes of a font on page 155 Table 16 Administering fonts 6 8 1 Adding a font li The possible attributes of a new font depend on the PCL of the target printer The supported attributes can be displayed with the command xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG see section Displaying information on Xprint V7 0 objects on page 82 There are two possible ways of defining a new font and adding it to the system you can either define a new font from scratch or you can copy an existing font and modify the relevant attributes in this copy Defining a completely new font e Check whether the PCL of the printer on which the jobs are to be printed with the new font supports the desired attributes xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG e Add anew font to the system with the following command xpadd fnt font_name attributes where font_name is the name of the object in which you save the desired font attributes 152 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering fonts The variable attributes represents a list of various options via which you can define the attributes of the new font tp typeface cs style hm horizontal_motion vm vertical_motion pq print_quality
58. host list with the following command xpmod usr selection hot host If selection is not specified the command refers to all the users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise can either you can specify the name s of the users whose host list you want to modify or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the users are selected For host specify the name of the host from which the user is to have common access to his her print jobs Example To add the new host delaware to the host list of user smith xpmod usr smith ho delaware To add the new host missouri additionally for all users xpmod usr hot missouri 134 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering users 6 6 3 Deleting a host from a user s host list If a defined user is no longer to be able to access his her print jobs from a specific host e g because there is now another user with the same user ID on this host you can delete this host from the list e Delete the host from the user s host list with the following command xpmod usr selection ho host If selection is not specified the command refers to all the users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the users whose host list you want to modify or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list o
59. in the directory var spool Xprint config filters If cm for command is not specified the filter program name must be identical to the filter name With options you can specify that defined names attributes or variables are passed on to the filter program for processing The Xprint V7 0 options are mapped by strings in the following format keyword pattern replacement There is only one blank between the context sensitive keyword and the pattern The equals sign is not enclosed in blanks An equals sign within the pattern must be escaped by a preceding backslash keyword specifies what must be considered when the option is generated The permitted keywords are listed in the corresponding table in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Each keyword represents context sensitive attributes which must match the pattern when the option is generated pattern defines when the option is to be generated It may be a value an asterisk or a regular expression If pattern matches the actual values extracted with the keyword the option is generated Otherwise no option is passed on to the filter U23841 J Z915 6 76 165 Administering filters Configuring Xprint V7 0 replacement describes how the option is to be passed on to the filter It can be extracted from the actual values which may be hidden behind keyword with the help of regular expressions amp and the combina tions and n replacement may also con
60. individually By default this list comprises all the printers of Siemens AG The xpconf_dev command is the quickest method of configuring an Siemens printer Also if you want to configure several similar printers not contained in the list it is often better to first extend the list and then call the xpconf_dev command instead of configuring these printers individually with the xpadd dev command The following table serves as a guide to the subsections dealing with configuring predefined printers If you want to Read configure an Siemens printer section Configuring predefined printers on page 109 extend the list of predefined printers section Extending the list of predefined printers on page 112 Table 10 Configuring predefined printers 108 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Predefined printers 6 3 1 Configuring predefined printers The xpconf_dev command provides a quick and easy method of adding a predefined printer Xprint V7 0 automatically selects the suitable emulation for the specified printer model and it suggests a default configuration which you only need to adjust if necessary Proceed as follows to add a new printer with xpconf_dev e Call xpconf_dev xpconf_dev The displayed screen should read similar to the following List of device models and emulations supported by Xprint V7 0 Seb SNI 2050 HP LASERJET 2 SN
61. lan_printer 9100 where lan_printer is the corresponding name for 129 12 73 68 registered in etc hosts SCSI e g Device address of the SCSI printer dev io0 sprin022 Table 31 Device addresses examples 262 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Appendix Checklist for adding a printer When you have entered all the given data in the worksheet you can fill out the other fields concerning printers Name and Supervisor name It makes sense to have the Xprint V7 0 administrator assign these globally to make sure that the names are unique within the Xprint V7 0 network You can choose any name you wish but every printer must be given a unique name The printers can be named for example according to their type their location or the computer to which they are connected It is only important that the names are unique throughout the network On every computer to which printers are connected there must be at least one supervisor defined which controls these printers Whether several printers are to be controlled by one supervisor or whether each printer is to have its own supervisor depends on the resource requirements processes and on avail ability considerations Each supervisor entered in the Connected printers table in the worksheet must also be entered in the Name field in the Supervisors used table Each supervisor is controlled by a server for which purpose any server in the network can be used For ea
62. left margin 2 5 cm and default font font4 xpadd frm letterl ls PORTRAIT ph 297m pw 210m tm 2c pl 24c Im 2 5c ft font4 To copy the form invoice3 to the new form forml without modifications xpcopy frm invoice3 forml To copy the form invoice to the form forml changing the default font to Times the left margin to 20 mm and the line length to 17 cm xpcopy frm invoice3 forml ft Times Im 20m 11 17c 6 9 2 Deleting a form You can delete from the Xprint V7 0 system any form you administer A form which is referenced by another object e g the default form of an existing printer cannot be deleted Neither is it possible to delete the default form GENERIC supplied with Xprint V7 0 To delete a form proceed as follows Log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator You can only delete a form if there are no references to other objects e g default form of a printer Check this with the xpshow command xpshow frm selection form diR For form you specify the name of exactly one form you want to delete If you want to delete several forms you must repeat this command for each one 158 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering forms For selection you can either specify a list of form names or you can define a list of selection criteria with the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix according to which the forms to b
63. new printer compatible with its PCL Compare the attributes with the LONG display of the xpshow pcl command for the PCL you have selected In the event of inconsistencies the xpadd dev command is rejected If use of the new printer is to be restricted to a specific group of users is there a suitable permission list already available in the Xprint V7 0 system The section Creating a permission list on page 144 contains a description of how to set up a permission list If you want to define a default form for the printer is this form already defined in the Xprint V7 0 system For information on how to add a form see the section Administering forms on page 156 Can the form you have selected as the default form for the printer be mounted automatically If this is not the case select another form or change the option mm to AUTOMATIC for the selected form Is the layup of the default form of the printer compatible with the PCL of the printer See the LONG displays of the commands xpshow frm and xpshow pcl to check this If the layup is not compatible modify the 1s option of the form accordingly Is the font of the default form compatible with the printer s PCL See the LONG displays of the commands xpshow fnt and xpshow pcl to check this If it is not compatible modify the form accordingly If there is no suitable font available you might have to add a font to the Xprint V7 0 264 U23841
64. not used for migrated file the request is rejected with access error on the file The user is suggested to use the cp option 9 4 Limitations and restrictions The following limitations are specific to Xprint V7 0 for Windows xprdir xpmount and xpconf_dev are not available on Windows Windows hosts cannot be configured as PARASITE the notification method MAIL is emulated by the Windows Messenger Service no fax or mail support DBinstall comand does not support the 1 option Mercator reduced map is not supported on Windows access to shared drives by means of the xpsetuser command the wildcards in document names are not supported on Windows due to system restrictions the BSD gateway option SRVTYPE WINNT is not supported U23841 J Z915 6 76 257 10 Appendix This Appendix contains various informative sections tables and worksheets for configuring and using Xprint V7 0 In detail Section Page Worksheet for configuring a new host 260 Checklist for adding a new printer 263 Selection criteria lists 266 SNMP Agent 268 Axis box support 270 TV CC Integration 270 Fax and mail support 271 Table 30 Overview of Appendix sections U23841 J Z915 6 76 259 Worksheet Appendix Worksheet Host name Location Disk capacity MB Free capacity Copy of database host type Y
65. of the systems in your Xprint V7 0 domain is allowed to use the printers connected to the remote system e g by the file etc hosts 1pd on the remote system or the remote BSD system If these requirements are met you can establish a connection to these printers which allows print jobs to be sent to them from within the local Xprint V7 0 domain The following figure illustrates the basic structure of such a connection U23841 J Z915 6 76 209 Accessing BSD printers Interoperability Xprint BSD Spool Print jobs a Figure 13 Accessing BSD printers To establish the connection to a BSD printer you must configure a pseudo printer on one system in your Xprint V7 0 domain which the Xprint V7 0 users can specify as the target for their print jobs and which forwards the print jobs it receives to the BSD printer by using the fast filter bsd for printing As this pseudo printer is addressed just like a local printer it is fully transparent to the users that the document is printed on a BSD printer and not on a local printer The only difference to a local printer is the fact that print jobs cannot be administered after submission Also displaying the job queue is only possible to a certain extent as print jobs are considered to be not yet printed only as long as they are not yet transferred to the remote BSD printer spooler If this functionality is required access via the
66. on page 152 plus a corresponding value Examples To modify the attributes of the font invoice from SansSerif to Courier and the line spacing from 4 to 5 xpmod fnt invoice tp Courier vm 5 To modify the character pitch of all fonts with the setting 10 cpi to 12 cpi xpmod fnt scl hm 10 hm 12 U23841 J Z915 6 76 155 Administering forms Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 9 Administering forms To make it easier for users to work with forms or constantly recurring document formats forms can be defined under Xprint V7 0 Such a form is an object with a name which is stored in the Xprint V7 0 database In this object different parameters paper size margins default font etc are stored and these can then be assigned to a print job via the object name whenever required Xprint V7 0 then applies the formatting parameters automatically to the print job Furthermore it is possible to define a default form for every printer which is automatically used for all the print jobs sent to this printer Xprint V7 0 is supplied with a default form called GENERIC This is assigned the default font GENERIC that is also supplied with Xprint V7 0 see section Admin istering fonts on page 152 as well as the default settings for all the options of the xpadd frm command If you want to Read define a new form section Adding a form on page 157 delete a form section Deleting a
67. perform an action on the active job on the original device The following values can be specified for job_handling DELETE The active job is to be deleted U23841 J Z915 6 76 63 Redirecting print jobs Managing print jobs RESTART BEGINNING When the job has been redirected to the new destination it is put at the top of the job queue and printed from the beginning RESTART FROM When the job has been redirected to the new destination it is put at the top of the job queue and printed starting with the page specified with option p SUSPEND When the job has been redirected to the new destination it is assigned the status SUSPEND TERMINATE The active print job is printed to the end and not redirected to the new destination In this case the original printer is set to the status SPOOLIN_OFF until the active job has finished printing If there is a printer error the user must correct it for example by setting the printer to the correct physical status When the job is finished the printer is set to the status NOT_ACTIVE p o p page If the value RESTART FROM is used with the j option the number page specifies the page number from which the active job is to be reprinted The j RESTART FROM p page option does not work with print jobs that are to be printed in PostScript format or raw mode i The use of the command and its options is displayed If xprdir is used with
68. permission lists is displayed and if the di LONG option is used also a list of the users contained in the list and whether it is an allowed or a denied list e Copy your chosen permission list with a new name xpcopy prm old_list new_list modifications With this command you copy an existing list old_list to a new list new_list If you wish you can also modify the copy at the same time by specifying modifications Which modifications are possible is described in the following section Examples To set up an allowed list right1 with the names of all users on host delaware enter the following commana xpadd prm rightl al delaware ca all users on delaware To set up a denied list right3 with the names of the users smith jones and brown on the host of the relevant object and the user grant on host nashua enter the following command xpadd prm right3 dn smith jones brown grant nashua To setup an allowed list right2 with all users on host delaware and the user jones on host colorado copy the list right1 and add jones xpcopy prm rightl right2 al jones colorado U23841 J Z915 6 76 145 Administering permission lists Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 7 2 Modifying a permission list You can modify a permission list by adding new entries to it or removing entries from it Adding entries to the list To add new entries to a permission list proceed as follows Log in as the Xprint V7 0 admi
69. print jobs xpchange gtw local_gw If only the import of print jobs is to be allowed you can use the gi ON option to only allow the export use the go ON option Restrictions of gateways to other Xprint V7 0 domains Working with gateways to other Xprint V7 0 domains is subject to certain restric tions which the users of these gateways must be familiar with The rm option of the xpadd job command cannot be used 222 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Gateways Example To configure a gateway connection from the local host hudson to host purple of another Xprint V7 0 domain xpadd gtw GTW_hudson tp LOCAL ho hudson np TCP pp GIP2 ga 5300 aa xpadd gtw GTW_purple tp PARTNER ho purple ga 5300 b1 GTW_hudson np TCP pp GIP2 xpmod gtw GTW_hudson ag GTW_purple xpchange gtw GTW_hudson 7 3 5 Gateways to DPRINT spoolers Gateways to DPRINT spoolers allow the users of the local Xprint V7 0 domain to access printers connected to BS2000 mainframes on which the spooler system DPRINT is installed Vice versa they can also be used to allow users of such BS2000 mainframes to access the printers of the local Xprint V7 0 domain The following figure shows the basic structure of such a gateway connection and the possibilities it offers Xprint Dprint i Prequests Print Job Print Job Status Resources Definition Resources Status Figure 1
70. printer specific non printable top and bottom margins is used Depending on the printer the margins on the printout may differ from the set values Therefore it is advisable to print a sample copy first in order to adjust the values for the printer Also bear in mind that the printable area is controlled by the wm option wrap mode of the xpadd job command p o U23841 J Z915 6 76 27 Using Xprint V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Switching double sided printing on off When printing jobs which comprise several pages it often makes sense to change the page settings for even and odd numbered pages in such a way that they face each other as in a book The margin settings should be set alternately to result in a symmetrical overall image The following figure shows the various options for double sided printing under Xprint V7 0 DOUBLE_WIDE amp PORTRAIT SINGLE amp PORTRAIT DOUBLE_NARROW amp PORTRAIT SINGLE amp LANDSCAPE DOUBLE_WIDE amp LANDSCAPE DOUBLE_NARROW amp LANDSCAPE Figure 6 Options for double sided printing sd side _specification This option is used to specify whether a form is to be printed only on one side SINGLE or on both sides In the case of double sided printing you specify the gutter for the portrait side DOUBLE_WIDE or for the landscape side DOUBLE_NARROW By default single sided p
71. provides a way to enforce YES or suppress NO the header page GTW_SEPARATOR_PAGE YES NO provides a way to enforce YES or suppress NO the separator sheet GTw_END_PAGE YES NO provides a way to enforce YES or suppress NO the trailer page Other interesting options are described in the Reference Manual Troubleshooting If requests from a remote BSD client are rejected by the local gateway the following values must be used op PI 0 PA 0123 e Therefore the safest way to define a local BSD gateway is to use the l following command xpadd gtw op PI 0 PA 1023 MODE COMPATIBLE Defining the partner gateway A separate partner gateway must now be specified for each connection to a BSD printer spooler The partner gateway is defined using the following command xpadd gtw bsd_partner tp PARTNER ho bsd_host ga 515 b1 local_gw np TCP pp BSD op option_list This command configures a partner gateway named bsd_partner which admin isters the logical connection to a special BSD printer spooler For bsd_partner any name can be used it does make sense however to use a name which indicates to which host the gateway is configured With the option ho bsd_host you specify the name of the remote host on which the LPD daemon process of the BSD spooler runs The option ga 515 specifies that the port 515 is to be used for accessing the BSD print services If the BS
72. settings yourself or you can add a first device to this host without any special specifica tions In this case the Xprint V7 0 system automatically creates a default server and supervisor U23841 J Z915 6 76 89 Rules for configuring the system Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Servers A server can control any number of supervisors In practice however three supervisors is a good number Where possible the server should be defined on the host of the supervisors Note that in this case the availability of the printers depends exclu sively on this particular host If you distribute servers and supervisors over several hosts you must remember that both hosts must be available in order to use the printers Supervisors Each supervisor must be controlled by a server A supervisor can control any number of printers in practice however fifteen printers per supervisor are recommended The supervisor must be defined on the same host on which the printers are defined Automatic server and supervisor object creation If no specific setting is used when creating a new device Xprint V7 0 automati cally generates default supervisors and server objects following the rules hereafter Anew supervisor is created for each 15 devices Anew server is created for each 3 supervisors These defaults settings can be changed by means of 2 envivariables XP_SPV_BY_DFTSRV Description maximum numbe
73. sp scheduling and up user_privileges you can define respectively what scheduling policy applies and which users can assign supervisors to the server see section Administering permission lists on page 143 See the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual for more detailed information Reactivate the server s xpchange srv selection Examples To modify the server nashua such that it no longer processes the jobs with the highest priority first but the jobs with the highest security level xpstat srv nashua xpchange srv nashua st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod srv nashua sp SECURITY xpchange srv nashua To modify all the servers of host colorado such that each server only processes a maximum of 20 print jobs xpstat srv scl ho colorado xpchange srv scl ho colorado st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod srv scl ho colorado mj 20 xpchange srv scl ho colorado The mj option stands for maximum jobs U23841 J Z915 6 76 199 Administering supervisors Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 16 Administering supervisors A supervisor controls one or more printers and provides them with user data A supervisor is controlled by one server and must be located on the same host as the printers it controls If you want to Read add a supervisor section Adding a supervisor on page 200 delete a supervisor section Deleting a supervisor on page 205 change the status of a supervisor section Act
74. specify the attributes to be modified You can use all the options which are allowed when adding a new supervisor with the xpadd spv command With the options ca comment_for_administrator Se server_name and ho host_name you can add a comment about the supervisor for administrators or you can assign the supervisor to another server or host respectively For more detailed information refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Reactivate the supervisor s xpchange spv selection Examples To modify the attributes of supervisor marcus and add a comment for the administrator saying that this supervisor is a copy of supervisor nile xpchange spv marcus st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod spv marcus ca copy_of_nile xpchange spv marcus To add a comment to all supervisors of host colorado saying that these can be deleted xpchange spv scl ho colorado st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod spv scl ho colorado ca please_delete xpchange spv scl ho colorado 204 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering supervisors 6 16 4 Deleting a supervisor With the command xpdel spv you can delete any supervisor you administer A supervisor with the status ACTIVE cannot be deleted Therefore you must first deactivate the supervisor You can also not delete a supervisor which is referenced by other objects e g a printer To delete a supervisor from the Xprint V7 0 system proceed as follows e Deactivate t
75. spool Xprint config bin DBinstall h host_name where host_name represents the name of an already active host e Start the Xprint V7 0 system xpstart Once all these operations have been carried out successfully you can configure printers and other Xprint V7 0 objects on this host The new host is now part of the Xprint V7 0 configuration 100 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering hosts users only 6 2 Administering hosts users only This section deals with the Xprint V7 0 objects of type host which must first be edited for new computers in an Xprint V7 0 configuration The following table serves as a guide through this section If you want to Read configure a local host which is not connected to other systems in a network section Configuring Xprint V7 0 on a stand alone system on page 101 introduce Xprint V7 0 to an existing network or configure a new network for Xprint V7 0 section Introducing Xprint V7 0 into a network on page 103 configure Xprint V7 0 on a new section Configuring a new host on system in the network page 98 Table 9 Administering hosts Reliant UNIX users 6 2 1 Configuring Xprint V7 0 on a stand alone system Configuring an individual stand alone system in Xprint V7 0 requires only a few steps The only measures concerning the host are the configuration of an Xprint V7 0 administrator and in high availabi
76. status INTERRUPTED If you activate a server with xpchange srv selection the printers assigned to it are not activated automatically Examples To reactivate server nashua and retain the jobs from the previous session xpchange srv nashua sa WARM To deactivate all servers controlled by host colorado xpchange srv scl ho colorado st NOT_ACTIVE 6 15 4 Modifying the attributes of a server You can modify the attributes of a server if for example you want to assign permissions to it which were not assigned when the server was set up Note The attributes of a server with the status ACTIVE cannot be modified Proceed as follows e Find out the status of the relevant server s xpstat srv selection For selection you can either specify a list of the servers whose status you want to display or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant servers are selected If you do not specify selection the status of all servers is displayed 198 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering servers If necessary deactivate the relevant server s xpchange srv selection st NOT_ACTIVE Modify the relevant attributes xpmod srv selection modifications For modifications you can specify all the values which can also be used when adding a server With the options
77. stored in the selected installation path Indeed the files to be printed are temporary stored in some installation subdi rectories At the end of the first installation two GIP2 gateways are created a LOCAL and a PARTNER one to allow the access from a Wprint client 250 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Xprint V7 0 for Windows Differences from Xprint V7 0 UNIX You need a license key to use Xprint V7 0 If this key is available to you at instal lation time you can introduce it during the setup Otherwise Xprint V7 0 will run with the full functionality during a limited period giving you sufficient time to get an official license key If the product has already been installed you can introduce the definitive key or an upgrade key using the command xpkey i which is described in the Reference Manual 9 3 2 Integration with Wprint The Wprint product is the Windows integrated client for Xprint V7 0 This product provides a very easy way to print from the Windows applications to your favourite Xprint V7 0 printers and also a powerful management of your print jobs submitted to Xprint V7 0 This is the major reason why Wprint is delivered on the same media as Xprint V7 0 for Windows For better performance it is advised to install Wprint and Xprint V7 0 on the same drive The installation procedure proposes three types of installations Xprint V7 0 and Wprint the suggested one Xprint V7 0 only and Wprint only The Xprint V7 0
78. system such as NFS e You should only forego copying the database if the relevant host has little l or no free disk capacity When you have defined whether a copy of the database is to be stored on the host decide on the host type of this computer If the host is to run without a database enter PARASITE in the Host type field If the host is to hold its own copy of the database you must still decide whether it can be the master host i e whether this host can take over the administration of the database and its distribution on the other hosts with a database or whether it can only play a passive role The default for defining a new host is potential master i e the host can administer the database In this case enter POT_MASTER in the Host type field If the host is to hold a passive copy of the database only enter SLAVE in the Host type field of the worksheet A slave can still use the printers of all the other slaves and the connected parasite hosts in the event of all potential masters failing Next you should note down all the printers connected to the host First enter the specifications for the Type Port type and Device address in the corre sponding columns of the table Under Type for example note the type identifier of the printer such as HP Laserjet or PostScript U23841 J Z915 6 76 261 Worksheet Appendix For Port type you have four options
79. the page height pw for the page width minus the non printable margins Im left_margin This option specifies the width of the left margin in inches i centimeters c or millimeters m or if no unit is specified in characters Il dine_length This option defines the maximum length of a print line which indirectly also determines the right margin This can also be specified in inches i centimeters c or millimeters m If no measurement is specified and no left margin is defined the value is interpreted as the number of characters per line If no value is specified the page width specified with the pw option minus the printer specific non printable margin widths is used This option is controlled by the option wm wrap mode i e the line length is modified if the printable line length is exceeded For more information refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual tm top_margin This option is used to specify the width of the top margin in inches i centimeters c or millimeters m or if no unit is specified in characters pl page_length This option defines the maximum length of a printed page and thus indirectly also the bottom margin This can also be specified in inches i centimeters c or millimeters m If no measurement is specified the value is interpreted as the number of lines per page If no value is specified and no top margin is defined the page height specified with the ph option minus the
80. the root user id but some of them are mapped to system privileges on Windows The different levels are recognized as follows on Windows e System users Xprint V7 0 users All Windows users can submit print jobs and manage their own jobs Windows users can also be registered in the Xprint V7 0 database with their login id as user name and the node name of the Windows system in the user host list They can then be granted the same rights as registered Xprint V7 0 UNIX users place print jobs at the top of the queue print on any device security level e System administrator Any user belonging to the Administrators group on Windows is granted the same Xprint V7 0 privileges on his system as the root user on UNIX e Local Xprint V7 0 administrator sub root Any system user can be promoted to sub root by a system administrator or the Xprint V7 0 administrator as with Xprint V7 0 UNIX e Xprint V7 0 administrator Any user registered in the Xprint V7 0 database can be nominated Xprint V7 0 administrator by modifying the Xprint V7 0 System object 252 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Xprint V7 0 for Windows Differences from Xprint V7 0 UNIX One special situation that must be described in more detail is the case where root is configured as Xprint V7 0 administrator which is the default after installation The mapping of the Windows members of the Adminis trators group to the UNIX root user when root is configured as Xprint V7 0 admi
81. the work of the failed one If the Xprint V7 0 database is stored on the shared disks of such a system the second host becomes active in the event of the normal host failing If this host has a different name the Xprint V7 0 database does not correspond to the real configuration In such a case the configuration can be adjusted quickly To do this you can rename the local host for the Xprint V7 0 system with the xppatch command Observe the following to execute the xppatch command successfully 1 xppatch only uses an Xprint V7 0 system which is defined locally Before the command executes it finds out whether Xprint V7 0 is installed locally or in the network 2 The xppatch command can only be used by the system administrator root 3 The Xprint V7 0 system must be stopped for xppatch to be executed xppatch checks if Xprint V7 0 is stopped 4 Before xppatch modifies a configuration or file it backs up all data that may be modified This backup requires approximately as much space on the hard disk in the file system in which Xprint V7 0 is installed as the sum of the DB and SV directories without log and debugging files If there is not enough space available on the hard disk the xppatch command aborts without modifying the original files 102 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering hosts users only To rename a host computer proceed as follows e Log into the system as the system administrator r
82. transfers This is to be performed via Start Programs openFT Security Administration the admission set of this account must allow every action Concerning Xprint V7 0 the same account and password must be provided via the tool set_FTuser i for the local logged user account or set_FTuser i lt DOMAIN gt lt USER gt for any user account ex set_FTuser i domain1 usertest or user usertest in domain domain1 9 3 8 WINDOWS 2000 special files Windows 2000 supports additional file types such as encrypted and migrated files With this new version of Xprint V7 0 these files are handled as described hereafter Printing encrypted files Xprint V7 0 runs under the system account This account does not permit Xprint V7 0 to access encrypted files To print encrypted files with Xprint V7 0 two ways are possible 1 Encrypted files can be printed using the cp option that makes a copy of the file to be printed into an Xprint V7 0 temporary directory The copy is made using the current user account immediately after he she issues the xpadd command That copy is not encrypted and is stored in a temporary directory where it can be accessed by everybody U23841 J Z915 6 76 255 Differences from Xprint V7 0 UNIX Xprint V7 0 for Windows 2 To deal with encrypted files without using the cp option Xprint V7 0 has to impersonate a privileged user before accessing encrypted files The xpsetuser c
83. use the following option lr loadable resources With this option you can reference a list of loadable resources Examples To display the loadable resources available in the system use the command xpshow Irs The system displays a list of all loadable resources that can be used For example you could use any of the loadable resources listed below Name Type Administrator PCL logo Overlay root PJL PCL5e font Softfont root PJL PCL5e e Please note that only those loadable resources are displayed which l have been defined by the Xprint V7 0 administrator Your own job loadable resources in the HOME Xprint file are not displayed but can also be used To print a document with a logo on every page xpadd dr mydocument 1r logo cr ALL Xprint V7 0 is only able to insert calls to resources at the top of a page ina document Other cases must be dealt with by the user The user must call the resource with the appropriate escape sequence see the printer manual and with the identifier known by the printer This identifier is shown in the Internal Id field in the xpshow Irs di LONG display U23841 J Z915 6 76 31 Using Xprint V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 3 4 4 2 Using Private Loadable Resources Only administrators can create public loadable resources but users can create private loadable resources To do this create a file named Xprint in your home directory You can inse
84. user that is still listed in an allowed list cannot be deleted Check first whether the user you wish to delete is referenced by other Xprint V7 0 objects Enter U23841 J Z915 6 76 137 Administering users Configuring Xprint V7 0 xpshow usr L selectionluser diR With user you specify exactly one user to be deleted If you want to delete several users you must repeat this command for each of these users If you do not specify a selection the command refers to all users in the system otherwise you can either specify a list of the users to be removed or you can define a list of selection criteria with the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix according to which the users to be removed are selected If references to the user are displayed you must remove these by modifying the displayed objects accordingly To delete user entries in the Xprint V7 0 system you as the Xprint V7 0 administrator must enter the following command xpdel usr selection If you do not specify a selection the command refers to all users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the users to be deleted or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant users are selected Examples To delete a
85. 0 e A gateway can only be deleted by the Xprint V7 0 administrator You must l first log in accordingly e f you want to delete a partner gateway you must first check whether the gateway to be deleted is registered as an allowed gateway at the responsible local gateway xpshow gtw local_gw diL If this is the case deactivate the local gateway remove the partner gateway from the list of allowed gateways and reactivate the local gateway xpchange gtw local_gw stN xpmod gtw local_gw ag gateway xpchange gtw local_gw e To finally delete the gateway use the following command xpdel gtw gateway where gateway is the name of the gateway to be deleted If gateway is a local gateway it must be deactivated before deletion Bear in mind that a complete gateway connection consists of two gateways the local gateway and the partner gateway If you want to delete the connection completely you must delete both gateways To find out which gateways are defined use the xpshow gtw command see section Obtaining information on a gateway on page 233 bul e U23841 J Z915 6 76 229 Administering gateways Interoperability Examples To delete the only connection originating from the gateway GTW_hudson to the partner gateway GIW_purple xpchange gtw GTW_hudson st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod gtw GTW_hudson ag GTW_purple xpdel gtw GTW_purple xpdel gtw GTW_hudson To delete
86. 0 6 13 1 Adding a PCL Adding a PCL via its unique name e To adda PCL to the Xprint V7 0 system via its unique name use the following command xpadd pcl pcl_name fi file_name pcl_name represents the unique name in the entry of file_name and repre sents a list of attributes which must be processed in order to control the attached printers e g PROPRINTER or EPSON FX file_name represents the absolute path name of the PCL file If you do not specify the absolute path name Xprint V7 0 searches the Xprint V7 0 directory var spool Xprint config PCL of the specified host see option ho All the PCLs supplied with Xprint V7 0 by default are located there in the xpterm file If no file name is specified Xprint V7 0 reads the PCL definition from standard input stdin Adding a PCL from another host If a PCL source file that you want to add to the Xprint V7 0 system is located on a computer other than the local host proceed as follows e Login as the Xprint V7 0 administrator Only he she has the right to add a PCL from another host e Now add the PCL using the following command xpadd pcl pcl_name fi file namel ho host_name where host_name represents the name of the host on which the PCL is administered and pcl_name is the unique name of the PCL With fi file_name you can specify the file which contains the PCL definition Examples To add the standard PCL POSTSCRIPT to your system xpadd pcl POSTSCRIPT
87. 0 administrator e Add a job template on the remote host xpadd jtp template_name options ah host_name template_name represents the name of the job template options stands for a list of options that may be used with the xpadd jtp command and which are applied whenever the template is used These are all the options available with the xpadd job command with the exception of te job_template see also chapter Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 U23841 J Z915 6 76 175 Administering global job templates Configuring Xprint V7 0 or host_name is the name of the remote host on which the template is added Log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator Add a job template on the remote host by copying an existing template to this host with or without modifications xpcopy jtp old_template new_template modifications ah host_name old_template represents the name of the existing template new_template stands for the new maybe modified template modifications represents a list of modifications which distinguish the new template from the old one Each entry in this list consists of an option of the xpadd jtp command and a corresponding value see also section Printing files on page 17 Examples To define the new job template invoice4 with the values destination printer form invoicel priority 75 xpadd jtp invoice4 de printer3 fm invoicel pr 75 To define a job template letter1 based o
88. 117 Administering devices Configuring Xprint V7 0 Once you have connected and configured a new printer you must activate it e Activate the printer by entering the following command xpchange dev printer_name You can also use the aa option for automatic activation of the xpadd dev command in which case the printer is available immediately after xpstart is executed 6 4 2 Deactivating a printer To deactivate a printer use the xpchange dev command There are three options available for deactivation you can only deactivate the printers you administer e You can deactivate a printer completely e You can deactivate spoolin e You can deactivate the printing itself spoolout Deactivating a printer completely Deactivating a printer completely means that it is not available for any actions in the system A complete deactivation makes sense for example if the printer is not available for a long period of time due to repairs e Use the following command to deactivate a printer xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE ju justification If you do not specify a selection all printers you manage in the Xprint V7 0 system are deactivated otherwise you can either specify a list of the printers to be deactivated or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the printers to be deactivated a
89. 32 Administering users aoaaa a 133 Defining a USEF ac ae ele 8 a a ae E N 133 Entering a defined user for other hosts 134 Deleting a host from auser s host list 135 Modifying user privileges 04 135 Deletingauser 2 2 02 000 137 Resetting user print quotas 138 Displaying information on users 140 Assigning a security level to a user 141 Administering permission lists 0 2 143 Creating a permission list 2 144 Modifying a permission list 22 146 Deleting a permission list 0 147 Granting or denying specific users access to a printer 148 Granting or denying specific users access to a printer group 149 Granting or denying specific users access to a form 149 Granting or denying specific printers access to a form 150 Allowing or prohibiting administration of supervisors 151 Administering fonts 0 0020004 152 Addingafont 0 000002 eee eee 152 Deletingafont 2 0 00 000 4 154 Modifying the attributes of a font 155 Administering forms 00 0000008 156 Adding efor ai tie toa eet al er Se a eles 157 Deleting a form 0 0 0 eee eee ee ee 158 Modifying the attributes of a form 160 Default forms for printers 22 160 Administering
90. 6 Gateway connection to DPRINT spoolers U23841 J Z915 6 76 223 Gateways Interoperability Requirements If a gateway to a DPRINT spooler in a BS2000 system is to be configured the software openFT must be installed on the host for which the local gateway is to be configured For the openFT root user OBS IBR and IBP must be set to the value 100 see openFT command ftmoda Defining the local gateway If a local gateway to another Xprint V7 0 domain already exists on a host which meets the requirements mentioned above this gateway can also be used for connections to DPRINT spoolers The local gateway is configured in exactly the same way as a gateway to another Xprint V7 0 domain xpadd gtw local_gw tp LOCAL ho local_host ga gtw_port np protocol pp GIP2 aa This command configures a local gateway named local_gw which administers the physical connection to the DPRINT spooler For local_gw any name can be used it does make sense however to use a name which indicates on which host the gateway is configured With the option ho Jocal_host you specify the name of the host which is to act as the gateway from the local Xprint V7 0 domain to the DPRINT spooler In the case of a TCP IP connection the option ga gtw_port specifies which TCP IP port number is to be used The default is 9999 e The port number is very important as no two gateways with the same port l number can run at the same time on a sys
91. 7 0 This might be sufficient for some users while other users will require further options Use the following basic command to print a complete document on your default printer xpadd job dr selection If you want to print a file you do not have to specify the object type job for the xpadd command as this is the default for xpadd The dr option document reference is used to select one or more files for printing After this option for selection specify the names of the files to be printed The command could have the following format xpadd dr file xpadd dr filel file2 txt file3 xyz If you have specified only one file only this file is sent to the printer if you have specified several files these are sent to the printer as one block This block of combined files or the solitary file is called a print job Instead of the xpadd command you can also use the X Open command 1p to submit a print job As with the other X Open commands Ipstat and cancel the 1p command is described in the SINIX Commands manual and in the appendix of the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual In addition to the dr option there are numerous possible options for controlling the printing process In the following sections many of these options are listed according to topics A complete alphabetical overview of all the available options can be found in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual under the command xpadd job The table below serv
92. 7 0 users printers and printer groups as well as on forms filters gateways and servers Only the print jobs are stored on the server which is responsible for their administration Xprint V7 0 domain All the Xprint V7 0 objects in particular the hosts for which an entry exists in a shared Xprint V7 0 database and which are administered by a single Xprint V7 0 administrator Xprint V7 0 user An Xprint V7 0 user is a user who is registered in the Xprint V7 0 database Xprint V7 0 allows extensive manipulation of the privileges of the Xprint V7 0 users within the Xprint V7 0 system 278 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Related publications 1 Xprint V7 0 Application Programming Interface API User Guide Target group This manual is for programmers who want to make use of the Xprint V7 0 functionality in their programs Contents The manual describes how you can use the functions of Xprint V7 0 API in your own programs Furthermore it contains a reference of all Xprint V7 0 API functions and the corresponding macros and functions 2 Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Target group Users and Administrators of Xprint V7 0 Contents This manual describes all the Xprint V7 0 commands and files and serves as a reference book which contains all the information required to use and administer Xprint V7 0 3 Xprint V7 0 Graphical User Interface User Guide Target group Users system administrators printer managers and progra
93. 915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering devices If selection is not specified the command refers to all the printers in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the printers to which you want to assign a security level or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant printers are selected For s1 security_level specify the desired security level Xprint V7 0 allows you to choose from UNCLASSIFIED default SENSITIVE CONFIDENTIAL SECRET TOP_SECRET Reactivate the printer xpchange dev printer_name For printer_name specify the name of the printer whose security level has been modified Examples To assign the security level CONFIDENTIAL to printer printers xpchange dev printer5 st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod dev printer5S s1 CONFIDENTIAL xpchange dev printer5 To display the security level of the printer printer4 xpshow dev printer4 di LONG To modify the security level of the printer printer5 to SECRET later xpchange dev printer5 st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod dev printer5S s1 SECRET xpchange dev printer5 U23841 J Z915 6 76 125 Administering printer groups Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 5 Administering printer groups Under Xprint V7 0 you can set up printer groups to speed up the output of print jobs If a print job is s
94. D system uses a different port number for the print services see etc services file on the BSD host you must specify the relevant port number here U23841 J Z915 6 76 217 Gateways Interoperability The partner gateway must be assigned with the b1 Jocal_gw option to the local gateway administering the physical connection local_gw can be an individual gateway or a list of local gateways In the latter case the first active gateway in the list is used to send a request to the partner gateway The option np TCP defines that the TCP IP protocol is used No other protocol can be specified In addition the print protocol must be selected with the pp BSD option The option op option_list can be used to define the behavior of the local gateway toward the corresponding contact gateway Here the options PI and PA are available Default values are PI 721 and PA 731 This port range is used by the local gateway to establish the connection to the BSD partner e The safest way to define a partner gateway is not to use the op option l but to accept the default values Xprint V7 0 also offers the option of addressing a number of clients via a partner gateway In this case use the following command xpadd gtw bsd_group pp BSD tp PARTNER ga 515 ho bsd_host bl local_gw oh pattern For pattern specify a string with replacement characters These can be either the asterisk representing any string o
95. FT tns_entry which specifies the TNS entry of the FT service on the host for the partner gateway The option ga port specifies which TCP IP port number is to be used This number must correspond to that of the DPRINT gateway of the DPRINT spooler The partner gateway or a list of partner gateways must be assigned with the b1 local_gw option to the local gateway administering the physical connection Adjusting the local Xprint V7 0 domain If the gateway is configured in such a way that the users of the DPRINT system can also use the printers of the local Xprint V7 0 domain some adjustments are required at the local Xprint V7 0 domain as DPRINT users might print documents with the EBCDIC character set For this reason a slow filter must be added to the Xprint V7 0 configuration for every possible content type the DPRINT users might use for EBCDIC documents In any case at least the following filter is required xpadd flt filter_name it EBCDIC_ EBCDIC_COMPATIBLE ot xpshow pcl di id cm ebcdic2ascii op pcl COMMENT 1 This command defines a filter with any unique name filter_name for the DPRINT format EBCDIC_COMPATIBLE As the output format for this filter all defined PCLs are specified For any other document types you might have to define other filters using this procedure e g EDCDIC_POSTSCRIPT to POSTSCRIPT xpadd flt it EBCDIC_POSTSCRIPT ot POSTSCRIPT cm ebcdic2ascii op pcl COMME
96. I 4007 EPSON LQ gt 3 SNI 4009 EPSON FX 4 SNI 4009 PROPRINTER ay 5 SNI 4010 EPSON LQ 6 SNI 4011 ECMA 9097 users only ay SNI 4011 EPSON LQ 8 SNI 4011 EPSON FX EEI SNI 4014 EPSON LQ 1 10 SNI 4014 PROPRINTER cree tL SNI 4806 HP LASERJET 12 SNI 4806 PROPRINTER 2313 SNI 4806 HP GL users only 14 SNI 4810 HP LASERJET lS SNI 4810 POSTSCRIPT Please type a number to select a device model press return to start customized processing q to quit or for help You can drive inside devices list using next previous screen All the printers contained in the var spool Xprint config data conf_dev file can be selected in this way e From this list select your printer model or a similar model with a suitable emulation by entering the corresponding number and pressing Enter The selected entry is then marked e g gt gt 1 SNI 2050 HP LASERJET U23841 J Z915 6 76 109 Predefined printers Configuring Xprint V7 0 e Confirm again with Enter e Next you must specify a printer address Please give a device address Type device address q to quit or for help Here you must specify to which port the printer is attached If the printer is connected to a serial parallel or SCSI port of one of the hosts you must specify the device file belonging to this port the format is for example dev term tty001 or dev term tty002 for serial dev 1p0 or dev 1p1 for para
97. If the Xprint V7 0 administrator is defined as a user there log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator otherwise as root e Enter the following command to add the new host to the database xpadd hos host_name re host_type sh supporting_host where host_name is the name of the relevant host and host_type the value you have entered in the worksheet The option re host_type re stands for responsibility may be omitted for potential masters If the value PARASITE is specified for host_type the value supporting_host for sh specifies on which system the database for this parasite host can be found li If a computer has been set up as a PARASITE host its supporting host must be running and Xprint V7 0 must be active on it for the PARASITE host to be able to access Xprint V7 0 Both systems must have the same hardware The administrator must make sure that the supporting host exports the var spool Xprint config DB directory to the PARASITE host and enters it in the parasite hos s directory under the same name The export and entry in the directory must be done manually by the administrator 106 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering hosts users only You can also specify additional options which above all affect the host hierarchy and which might depend on the network structure see the description of the command xpadd hos in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual e Ifthe Xprint V7 0 administrator is also
98. Interoperability Allowing print jobs to be submitted by users of the other Xprint V7 0 domain If you want to allow users of the other Xprint V7 0 domain to submit print jobs for local printers via the gateway the partner gateway must be defined as an allowed gateway at the local gateway To do this use the following command xpmod gtw local_gw ag spool_partner With this command the partner gateway spool_partner is assigned to the local gateway local_gw as an allowed gateway Only the Xprint V7 0 domains which are connected to the local Xprint V7 0 domain via allowed partner gateways are allowed to use its print services You can also define all partner gateways as allowed gateways by using the keyword ALL xpmod gtw local_gw ag ALL In this case only the value ALL needs to be specified with the ag option Therefore the character is not specified after the ag option in the example above e Please note that when the option ag ALL is used any partner gateway l added is automatically granted permission to access the local gateway Activating the gateway connection To be able to print via the gateways the corresponding local gateway must be activated Activation with the xpchange command can be effected on several levels you can allow only the export of print jobs via the assigned partner gateways only the import from these gateways or both The following command allows both the import and export of
99. J Z915 6 76 Appendix Checklist for adding a printer 10 system For information on adding a font see the section Administering fonts on page 152 Is the printer to use a specific set of recovery rules for error recovery In this case make sure that a suitable object is available in the Xprint V7 0 system The section Administering recovery rules on page 186 contains detailed information on creating and setting up recovery rules Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter before printing the jobs If this is the case check if the relevant filter is already available in the Xprint V7 0 system The section Administering filters on page 162 contains information on how to set up a fast filter Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter before printing the jobs If this is the case check if the relevant filter is already available in the Xprint V7 0 system The section Administering filters on page 162 contains information on how to set up a fast filter Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter before printing the jobs If this is the case check if the relevant filter is already available in the Xprint V7 0 system The section Administering filters on page 162 contains information on how to set up a fast filter Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter before printing the jobs If this is the case check if the relevant filter is already available in the Xprint V7 0 system
100. NT 1 U23841 J Z915 6 76 225 Gateways Interoperability Restrictions of gateways to DPRINT spoolers Wildcards or are not allowed but you can specify xpshow dev dprint_gateway without a printer name and xpshow dgr dprint_gateway without a printer group name In this case all corresponding resources are displayed If information on a printer of a DPRINT spooler is displayed you should be aware that some of the requested items of information are not supported by the DPRINT spooler The displayed values for this information are invalid amongst others this applies to the information on Keep connection Open retry time Automatic activation Polling enabled and Priority When defining a print job for a DPRINT printer with xpadd job the following must be observed e For every job a document type must be specified with the ct option The l document type PLAIN_TEXT represents an ASCII text which contains only the control characters CR LF and FF This data type replaces the value SIMPLE which is not supported under DPRINT Examples To configure a gateway connection between the local host hudson and the DPRINT spooler of the BS2000 system D255S017 xpadd gtw GTW_hudson tp LOCAL ga 5200 ho hudson np TCP pp GIP2 aa xpadd gtw GTW_S017 tp PARTNER ho d255s017 ga 5200 on D255S017 oh D255S017 b1 GTW_hudson np TCP pp GIP2 op FT FT25517 xpmod gtw GTW_hudson ag GTW_SO17
101. O UNIX TOPCALL version 3 0 runs on Windows NT The TOPCALL support in Xprint V7 0 is certified on every supported UNIX system SMTP any SMTP server that is compatible with RFC 1521 can be used The SMTP support in Xprint V7 0 is certified on every supported UNIX system Please inquire about the document formats your fax software supports Using an unsupported format does not generate any error in Xprint V7 0 it is only a document carrier to the fax software but will lead to unexpected fax output Optio FaxFX does not support the PJL printer language embedded in Postscript files for instance The fax and mail support is not available on the Windows platforms U23841 J Z915 6 76 271 Glossary Backend This is a driver program responsible for controlling printers In addition it is responsible for error recovery and printer status information Character set The letters digits punctuation marks and symbols available for a font Direct printing Under Xprint V7 0 you do not necessarily have to place a print job in the print queue You can also send a print job directly to a printer in this case however the job cannot be modified after submission Encrypted files The Encrypted File System EFS introduced in Windows 2000 is used to prevent unhautorized access to sensitive stored data Fast filter This is a program which enhances the functionality of Xprint V7 0 Above all fast filters are used to enhance t
102. PT GENERIC hudson root printer2 HP LASERJET GENERIC colorado root e Now choose a printer name which does not yet exist in the list and configure your printer at the selected or specially defined supervisor xpadd dev device_name da device_file co type su supervisor_name pc pcl_name aa device_file specifies to which port the printer is attached e g dev term tty001 or dev term tty002 for serial or dev 1p0 or dev 1p1 for parallel ports or 192 210 192 127 9100 for a LAN connection With type you specify which type of port is used for your printer Possible values for type are SERIAL for a serial port PARALLEL for a parallel port SCSI for a SCSI high performance printer and LAN for a LAN printer The default is SERIAL If required you can specify the responsible supervisor with supervisor_name If you omit this specification Xprint V7 0 uses the supervisor with the name of the host to which the printer is attached If you do not specify a supervisor Xprint V7 0 will automatically define a default supervisor With pci_name you define which printer capability list is to be used for addressing your printer Possible values include HP LASERJET POSTSCRIPT PROPRINTER and HP DESKJET The default is GENERIC See the Reference Manual to find out which PCL to specify for the printer you use The aa option can be used to have the printer activated automatically whenever Xprint V7 0 is started U23841 J Z915 6 76
103. UNIX users Xprint V7 0 users can access their print jobs from all the hosts for which they are registered They can be assigned a security level and thus be granted access to printers with a corresponding security level Print quotas can be defined for the number of jobs or print pages allowed thus preventing users from making unlimited numbers of printouts U23841 J Z915 6 76 77 Xprint V7 0 architecture Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 e The Xprint V7 0 system sys The Xprint V7 0 system refers to all the Xprint V7 0 objects which are combined in a local administrative unit what is called an Xprint V7 0 domain Within the Xprint V7 0 system the Xprint V7 0 administrator is allowed to perform all the administrative tasks The only operations that can be executed for the Xprint V7 0 system are displaying or changing the Xprint V7 0 administrator as well as the Xprint V7 0 system comments 78 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Administrative tasks under Xprint 5 3 Administrative tasks under Xprint Administering Xprint V7 0 involves a number of tasks which must be performed by the administrator This section gives a general description of the different tasks and describes the basic procedures For detailed information on adminis tering the individual objects see the next chapter 5 3 1 Configuring Xprint V7 0 objects With the xpadd command you can add Xprint V7
104. V7 0 architecture 5 2 1 The Xprint V7 0 objects The following objects are defined in Xprint V7 0 the parentheses contain the short name of the Xprint V7 0 objects for use in Xprint V7 0 commands Filters f1t Filters have the function of converting the data sent to the printer by the user into the format required by the printer This makes it possible for example to print normal ASCII files on PostScript printers as Xprint V7 0 is supplied with the filter vppost Document in format x Document in format y automatic if available Figure 11 Filters Two types of filter are distinguished under Xprint V7 0 Slow filters are executed before the actual spool process i e after the job is submitted but before it is printed They convert data or allow special print modes such as printing in columns or landscape mode Fast filters are used to enhance the print functionality provided by Xprint V7 0 If used they are the last link in the chain of Xprint V7 0 objects they edit the print job and are in direct contact with the printer Their main function is to provide a connection with objects other than the standard components They receive the feedback from the printer and forward it to the supervisor in a form it can understand As an administrator you can define and compile modify or delete your own filters fast and slow For a description of how to define new filters see t
105. When printing is finished the user removes the form from the printer and notifies the system of this xpmount f d printerl Again the confirmation is displayed on the screen Form unmounted for printerl1 To print the document file2 on printer printer2 using the form manual xpadd job dr file2 de printer2 fm manual The user mounts the required form Then he she enters the command xpmount this time avoiding the query by specifying the required values explicitly xpmount f manual d printer2 s Xprint V7 0 confirms with the following message Form manual is now mounted on device printer2 The printer starts printing the document file2 When printing is finished the user unmounts the form on the printer and notifies the system of this xpmount f d printer2 Again the confirmation is displayed on the screen Form unmounted for printer2 U23841 J Z915 6 76 43 Job templates Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 3 6 Job templates Just as different font settings can be combined in the font objects print job settings can be combined in an Xprint V7 0 object This is called a job template jtp Job templates can either be predefined by the administrator for the entire system and made available to all users or they can be defined by each individual user as private job templates In Xprint V7 0 jobs are sent to a device a device group or to an unspecified target This is different to a number of other print
106. Xprint V7 0 User s and Administrator s Guide Edition June 2002 Comments Suggestions Corrections The User Documentation Department would like to know your opinion of this manual Your feedback helps us optimize our documentation to suit your individual needs Fax forms for sending us your comments are included in the back of the manual There you will also find the addresses of the relevant User Documentation Department Certified documentation according DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 To ensure a consistently high quality standard and user friendliness this documentation was created to meet the regulations of a quality management system which complies with the requirements of the standard DIN EN ISO 9001 2000 cognitas Gesellschaft f r Technik Dokumentation mbH www cognitas de Copyright and Trademarks Copyright 2002 Fujitsu Siemens Computers GmbH All rights reserved Delivery subject to availability right of technical modifications reserved All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective manufacturers This manual is printed on paper treated with chlorine free bleach Preface Introduction to Xprint V7 0 Printing with Xprint V7 0 Managing print jobs Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Interoperability Installing Xprint V7 0 Xprint V7 0 for Windows NT Appendix Continued gt Glossary R
107. a gateway connection from the gateway GIW_nashua to the partner gateway GTW_picasso but maintaining the connections to other partner gateways xpchange gtw GTW_nashua stN xpmod gtw GTW_nashua ag GTW_picasso xpdel gtw GTW_picasso xpchange gtw GTW_nashua 7 4 3 Deactivating a gateway If a local gateway is to be modified or temporarily not used you can lock it against further use by deactivating it There are three possible ways of doing this You can deactivate a local gateway completely so that no gateway connection in either direction can be used You can deactivate the passing on of print jobs to the other printer spooler or only the use of the gateway by the other printer spooler one direction This affects all partner systems You can deactivate only the access from one partner gateway to a local gateway This can prevent a specific remote system from sending requests to the local Xprint V7 0 system p o To deactivate a local gateway you must be logged in as the administrator 230 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Administering gateways Deactivating a local gateway completely e Use the following command to completely deactivate a gateway xpchange gtw gateway st NOT_ACTIVE where gateway is the local gateway to be deactivated This deactivates the connections to all remote partner gateways connected to the local gateway The option st NOT_ACTIVE may be abbreviated t
108. a list of modification which distinguish the new loadable resource from the old one Each entry in this list consists of an option of the xpadd lrs command and a corresponding value Itis possible to refer to a class name rather than referring to the actual name of a resource Let s consider a logo defined for HP Laserjet but also for Reno emulation The file 1ogo hp contains the data to be downloaded to an HP Laserjet printer before the logo can be called In a similar way the file logo reno has to be downloaded to a Reno printer Two resources can be defined for this purpose xpadd Irs logohp fi logo hp pc HP LASERJET tp Overlay cn mylogo xpadd Irs logoreno fi logo reno pc RENO tp Overlay cn mylogo Both resources will belong to the same class as my1ogo Jobs can after wards be submitted as xpadd dr mydocument 1r mylogo Once a printer either HP Laserjet or Reno is free for handling the job the printing system will select the appropriate resource If the job comes out on a Reno printer then the 1 ogo reno resource will be used 172 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering public loadable resources 6 11 2 Deleting a loadable resource With the xpdel 1rs command you can delete any loadable resource that you administer To delete a loadable resource proceed as follow e Delete the loadable resource with the following command xpdel lrs Lidentifier_list scl selection_criteria_li
109. ad configure a new printer section Adding a printer on page 116 deactivate a printer section Deactivating a printer on page 118 activate a printer section Reactivating a printer on page 120 remove a printer section Removing a printer on page 121 connect a printer to another system section Reconnecting a printer to another system on page 122 reconnect a printer to a different port on the same system section Reconnecting a printer to a different port on page 122 replace an existing printer with a new printer section Replacing an existing printer with a new one on page 123 grant or deny a printer access toa form section Granting or denying specific printers access to a form on page 150 grant or deny specific users access to a printer section Granting or denying specific users access to a form on page 149 change the security level of a printer section Assigning a security level toa printer on page 124 assign a filter to a printer section Assigning a filter to a printer on page 169 Table 12 Administering printers 114 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering devices If you want to Read cancel the assignment of a filter to a printer section Removing a filter from a printer on page 170 assign a form to a printer se
110. age 171 delete a loadable resource the section Deleting a loadable resource on page 173 Table 19 Administering loadable resources 6 11 1 Defining a loadable resource There are two possible ways of defining a loadable resource you can define a new one from scratch or copy an existing loadable resource and modify it Defining a loadable resource from scratch e To define a new loadable resource use the following command xpadd lrs resource_name options where the variable resource_name represents the name of the loadable resource and options stands for a list of options that can be used with the xpadd lrs command U23841 J Z915 6 76 171 Administering public loadable resources Configuring Xprint V7 0 Extending the definition of a loadable resource A quick method of defining a loadable resource is to copy an existing resource and modify it as required Proceed as follows e To find out which loadable resources are already defined in the system and the attributes they have enter the following command xpshow Irs A list of existing loadable resources is displayed together with their attributes e Now copy a suitable loadable resource and make the required modifications xpcopy lrs old_Irs new_Irs modifications old_irs represents the name of the existing loadable resource and new_Irs stands for the new possibly modified loadable resource The variable modifi cations represents
111. al gateway itself Only an active gateway can be used by local and remote users Setting up a backward link from a partner gateway to the local gateway A connection between two gateways requires such a backward link Allowing a partner gateway access Only if a partner gateway is granted access explicitly can users of the partner system access the local resources Only the Xprint V7 0 administrator subroot or root can activate a gateway You must first log in accordingly ul o Activating the local gateway e To completely activate a gateway use the following commana xpchange gtw gateway where gateway is the gateway to be activated This also activates all the connections between remote partner gateways and the local gateway Activating job export mode for a local gateway You can activate a local gateway such that it can process the requests of the allowed partner gateways proceed as follows e Activate the connection using the following command xpchange gtw gateway go ON Activating job import mode for a local gateway If you want to grant a partner gateway access to the resources of the local Xprint V7 0 domain you must enter the partner gateway as an allowed gateway on the local gateway e Reactivate the local gateway using the following command xpchange gtw gateway gi ON 232 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Administering gateways 7 4 5 Obtaining information on a gatewa
112. an define the following privileges under Xprint V7 0 Which users may may not use a printer a printer group or a gateway Which administrators may assign a new supervisor to a specific server Which users may may not use a specific form Which forms may may not be used on a specific printer There are two types of permission list allowed lists and denied lists An allowed list is used to specify which users or forms are allowed to use the relevant object while the denied list defines which users or forms are not allowed to use a specific object The allowed list of a printer for example restricts use of the printer to the users contained in the list The denied list of a printer defines that the printer can be accessed by all users except for those contained in the list e The administrator of a specific object printer server form can l always access the object irrespective of the contents of the associated permission list Basically permission lists for objects are handled as follows if there is an entry in the allowed list the denied list is ignored if the allowed list is empty the denied list applies If both lists are empty access to the object is unrestricted e Print jobs job Print jobs are submitted by users and as described in the previous section can be modified They are administered by the servers responsible for the respective print queues Print jobs are not part of th
113. and Wprint mode provides a complete solution for your printing on a Windows server The applications running on this machine can print on Xprint V7 0 printers and the jobs can be managed in Xprint V7 0 The Xprint V7 0 only mode is interesting when the Windows is a print server without any application submitting print jobs The Wprint only mode installs only Wprint and is suggested for Windows workstations Concerning the integration for the Wprint configuration the reader is referred to the section 2 3 1Graphical interface for administration Mercator and the description of this specific Windows functionality If Wprint is installed on a Xprint V7 0 Windows system it is recommended to use the local gateway as entry point in Xprint V7 0 U23841 J Z915 6 76 251 Differences from Xprint V7 0 UNIX Xprint V7 0 for Windows 9 3 3 Start up and shutdown Xprint V7 0 appears as a Windows service which can be controlled from the Control Panel The default start up mode is automatic meaning that Xprint V7 0 is started and stopped at system boot up and shutdown respectively To start and stop Xprint V7 0 the administrator can either use the xpstart xpstop commands or operate the service from the Windows Control Panel 9 3 4 Responsibilities The responsibility levels in Xprint V7 0 are described in the section Responsi bilities on page 67 These levels are based exclusively on user identifiers in UNIX for example
114. ate values within one field If this variable is not set the space character is used by default U23841 J Z915 6 76 57 Displaying print jobs Managing print jobs Basically there are two ways of setting these variables You can define them globally i e the selected settings are used for all invoca tions of the xpshow command until the variables are modified again Variable value LVariable2 value LVariable3 value export Variable Variable2 Variable3 If you only want to use the display settings once enter the variables separated by spaces in one line together with the command Variable value LVariable2 value Variable3 value xpshow job Status of print jobs e The xpstat command allows you to display the status of a submitted print job xpstat job job di LONG For job you can specify either a job identifier or a selection list Information on the selected print jobs is then displayed job by job If you omit job you receive information on all the existing print jobs If you do not specify the option di LONG the SHORT format will be displayed by default The State field contains information for example on the status of the printout on error messages etc for a complete list of the messages see the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual The Rank field contains the print job s position in the print queue the lower the value the sooner it will be printed If a print job is waiting fo
115. atic settings while xpchange changes the dynamic state List of print jobs You can display a list of print jobs to find out for example the names of the existing print jobs e To display a list of all the existing print jobs use the following command xpshow job This command returns a table with all the print jobs you can access This table contains only the most important information Detailed information on print jobs You can output more detailed information on one or more print jobs to find out for example which options are set for the print jobs e To display detailed information on a print job use the following command xpshow job job di LONG For job you can specify either a job identifier or a selection criteria list Infor mation on the selected print jobs is then displayed job by job If you omit job you receive information on all the existing print jobs The output of xpshow job is self explanatory and therefore not described here U23841 J Z915 6 76 55 Displaying print jobs Managing print jobs Selected information on print jobs You can also display only specific attributes of print jobs This is again achieved by means of parameter lists or templates Displaying attributes via parameter list e f you only want to display specific attributes for print jobs use the following command xpshow di parameter_list The selected attributes must be specified for parameter_list listin
116. ation on the xprdir command refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual e When redirecting a print job to another printer the new printer must l support the data format of the original target printer as no filters can be specified Examples Aprintjob with the ID se2 4is to be redirected to printer1 given priority 15 and printed from string fgh through string str xpmod job se2 4 de printerl pr 15 fr fgh to str All print jobs you have submitted for printer3 are set to the default priority xpmod job scl de printer3 pr U23841 J Z915 6 76 61 Modifying a submitted print job Managing print jobs To redirect a print job Spoolin print job jobl on printer printer1 which only supports the data format POSTSCRIPT there is a filter available however for converting the format SIMPLE to POSTSCRIPT xpadd job dr jobl de printerl ct SIMPLE If the print job is then redirected to the printer printer2 this must be able to handle the data format POSTSCRIPT as jobl was automatically converted at spoolin xpmod job jobl de printer2 To redirect a print job to a remote domain specify the remote printer by partner_gateway_name destination name xpmod job jobl de gtwl printer31 62 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Managing print jobs Redirecting print jobs 4 4 Redirecting print jobs The xprdir command can be used to redirect print jobs assigned to a specific printer to another printer
117. b jobl xpadd dr filel file2 file3 jt jobl js BRIEF sp FULL 34 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options 3 4 7 Printing several copies of a document There are two possible ways of printing several copies of a document Firstly you can print the entire document and secondly you can print each page of the document several times The difference is that in the first case the copies of the document are sorted while in the second case they are not The second option however might be faster if the printer itself can print several copies of individual pages e g HP LASERJET printers You can define the number of copies for the entire document using the following option fc number number defines the number of copies of the specified documents to be printed If this option is not specified exactly one copy of each document is printed If you have access to a printer supporting multiple printouts e g an HP LASERJET printer you can use the following option to print several copies of each individual page fp number In this case number defines how often each page of the job is to be printed i This option is not supported by PostScript printers Examples To print three copies of a document xpadd dr filel fc 3 To print five copies of pages 1 through 5 of a document one after the other xpadd dr filel ps 1 5 fp 5 U23841 J Z915 6 76 35 Using
118. b was canceled the files are not removed from the system If a retention period was specified with the rp retention_period option this file is only deleted when this period of time has elapsed If Xprint V7 0 is not active on the relevant host system at the scheduled delete time the files cannot be removed If the options cp and rm are used simultaneously the rm option is ignored without notice and only cp is interpreted p o U23841 J Z915 6 76 33 Using Xprint V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 3 4 6 Defining separator pages With printers which are used by many users at the same time or when listing paper is used it can make sense to add separator pages between the different print jobs This makes it easier to distinguish the print jobs of the individual users or two different print jobs For this purpose Xprint V7 0 offers the option of defining print jobs with a start or end sheet Additionally individual files of one job can be separated by adding separator sheets js job_start_sheet je job_end_sheet Sp Separator_sheet With a print job you can specify whether start and end sheets are to be printed or in the case of several documents also separator sheets between the documents The variables of these options can be set to the following values BRIEF FULL and NONE The default is NONE Example To insert a start sheet of type BRIEF and separator sheets of type FULL for print jo
119. be say a relatively long period of time between the submission and execution of a print job 88 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Rules for configuring the system 5 4 2 Configuring hosts All UNIX hosts belonging to an Xprint V7 0 domain and on which Xprint V7 0 has been installed must be defined in the Xprint V7 0 configuration Every host which is to provide its print services must be defined as POT_MASTER even if it is the only host in operation The hierarchy of potential master hosts should be defined such that the host with the best equipment ranks first A host without hard disk or with a limited or full hard disk should be defined as a PARASITE host In this case the Xprint V7 0 database must be imported from what is called a supporting host by means of an explicit command The advantage of such hosts is the fact that less hard disk space is used as the database is only stored on the supporting host and some processes do not have to be running e g the services of the database manager The other computers are defined as SLAVE hosts 5 4 3 Configuring printers To be able to add printers to the Xprint V7 0 system you require at least one server responsible for administering printers and their job queue and a super visor responsible for the actual printing process There are two different ways of defining servers or supervisors you can either define the required
120. cally each time Xprint V7 0 is started Defining the partner gateway A separate partner gateway must now be specified for each connection to another Xprint V7 0 domain This partner gateway defines a logical connection to another host on another Xprint V7 0 domain On this host a gateway for the connection to the local gateway must also be configured mirrored configu ration The partner gateway is configured using the following command xpadd gtw spool_partner tp PARTNER ho spool_host ga gtw_port b1 local_gw np TCP This command configures a partner gateway named spool_partner which admin isters the logical connection to a special Xprint V7 0 domain For spool_partner any name can be used it does make sense however to use a name which indicates to which Xprint V7 0 domain the gateway is configured With the option ho spool_host you specify the name of the remote host on which the gateway to the other Xprint V7 0 domain is configured The option ga gtw_port specifies which TCP IP port number is to be used This number must correspond to that of the local gateway of the other Xprint V7 0 domain The partner gateway must be assigned with the b1 local_gw option to the local gateway administering the physical connection ocal_gw can represent a single gateway or a list of local gateways The option np TCP defines that the TCP IP protocol is used No other protocol can be specified U23841 J Z915 6 76 221 Gateways
121. ch local supervisor on the computer enter the name of the server responsible for this supervisor Server name field and on which computer the server runs Host name field As already described a default supervisor server can be used for each host By default these are named after the corresponding host When you have completed the worksheet the computer can be added to the Xprint V7 0 system Checklist for adding a printer There are a large number of options available for the xpadd dev command which allow you to optimally adjust every printer in the Xprint V7 0 system to meet the requirements of your environment To be able to make the best possible use of these options you may have to set up permission lists forms fonts filters etc before adding a new printer to the system Furthermore you should know which printer attributes are supported by the PCL of the new printer Use the following questions to check whether all the requirements for using the xpadd dev command are fulfilled U23841 J Z915 6 76 263 Checklist for adding a printer Appendix Questions A 2 Has the address of the new printer been defined in the system If you do not want to use the default supervisor does the supervisor of the new printer already exist on the host on which the printer is to be added If this is not the case first set up the supervisor and then add the printer Are the attributes you have selected for the
122. ckground logo soft font etc They also improve job recovery A loadable resource must be downloaded to the printer before it can be called by a print job Public loadable resources can be created modified or deleted for the whole system by the Xprint V7 0 administrator Individual users can create modify or delete private loadable resources that is loadable resources that are for their use only e Permission lists prm Permission lists make it possible to define who may use which Xprint V7 0 resources by granting the relevant privileges The administrator can define the following privileges for users under Xprint V7 0 Which users may may not use a device or a device group in Xprint V7 0 or other environments Which users may may not use a specific form Which forms may may not be used on a specific printer e Recovery rules rec Recovery rules are used to describe how specific device conditions are handled The default recovery procedure in the case of a device error can be overridden by a recovery rule In the case of the device error paper_end for example the default is for the Xprint V7 0 system to continue trying to print the job until the paper cassette is refilled You could use a recovery rule to specify a different procedure for example to suspend the print job and set the device to NOT_ACTIVE until the administrator intervenes 12 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to Xprint V7 0 Xprint V7 0 ele
123. create a file named Xprint V7 0 in your home directory You can insert as many comment lines as you like Comment lines must start with the character The definition of the job template starts with the template name This is followed by the options for this template All xpadd options are allowed Strings must be enclosed in inverted commas or quotes e g jc a comment If a definition is to be continued in the next line the current line must end with a backslash e Job templates are a convenient way of combining recurring option l sequences to form a template e g if you want to assign a specific font to a specific paper format In this way you do not have to specify all your selected settings for every print job When defining a customized job template you do not necessarily have to define all settings but you can also modify the settings of an existing template such that it meets your requirements Examples The following example shows several simple job templates Private Xprint file JOB TEMPLATE for letters letter de printerl fm form3 la USA jt letters cp for ASCII files on PostScript printer printer2 a2ps de printer2 ct SIMPLE cp with notification of success or failure notification ev COMPLETED ABORTED nm WRITE nd Send message on termination This example shows the templates letter and notification The templates are then used as follows xpa
124. ction Default forms for printers on page 160 assign a PCL to a printer section Assigning a PCL to a printer on page 183 define a new recovery rule section Defining a recovery rule on page 186 assign a recovery rule to a printer section Assigning a recovery rule toa printer on page 190 Table 12 Administering printers The following sections assume that Xprint V7 0 is installed correctly on all the relevant systems see chapter Installing Xprint V7 0 U23841 J Z915 6 76 115 Administering devices Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 4 1 Adding a printer If your system has a printer attached this printer must be managed by a local supervisor which itself must be controlled by a server in the network You can use a default supervisor an existing defined supervisor or you can define a new one If you define a new supervisor you can assign it to any existing server in the network or define a separate new server for it or use a predefined default server You can also add a printer without first having defined a server and supervisor In this case the following applies if you add a printer with the xpadd dev command and no server or supervisor are defined on the local host Xprint V7 0 automatically configures a server and supervisor with the name of the host on which they are defined The new printer is automatically assigned to these objects Selecting a server e T
125. dd dr filel te letter xpadd dr filel te notification pr 5 For the printout the options defined for this template are used instead of the specified te option 46 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Job templates If a customized job template has the same name as a predefined job template the customized one is given preference over the predefined template when this name is selected This means that your Xprint V7 0 file is searched first for the customized job template If it cannot be found the Xprint V7 0 file does not exist or is not readable the job template is assumed to be a globally defined template pi o U23841 J Z915 6 76 47 4 Managing print jobs This section shows the possible ways of displaying modifying or deleting a submitted print job The following table serves as a guide through this section If you want to Read display a print job section Displaying print jobs on page 55 modify a submitted print job section Modifying a submitted print job on page 61 delete a print job section Deleting print jobs on page 65 Table 3 Managing print jobs As you have to select submitted print jobs to be able to delete or modify them the following section Selecting a print job first describes the possible ways of selecting print jobs 4 1 Selecting a print job To manage a submitted print job you must first select th
126. depends on the printer involved e First check the settings of the existing printer xpshow dev printer di LONG This displays a list of all the settings for the specified printer printer e Use the checklist on page 263 in the Appendix to check if all the required preparatory steps for modifying the printer have been taken or if you want to use any of the further configuration options mentioned there forms filters permission lists etc e Check whether the relevant printer is still active with the following command xpstat dev selection e lf the printer is still active output Status ACTIVE you must deactivate it xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE e Then modify all the settings which have changed for the new printer with the following command xpmod dev printer Loptions_to_be_modified For options_to_be_modified you can specify any of the options which can also be specified when defining a new printer see also section Adding a printer on page 116 and the description of the xpmod dev command in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual U23841 J Z915 6 76 123 Administering devices Configuring Xprint V7 0 Example The old printer printer1 used the PCL HP_LASERJET but the new printer is a PostScript printer xpmod dev printerl pc POSTSCRIPT ct The ct option makes sure that the data format of the printer is adjusted to the default which depends on the PCL You can only modify a PCL
127. e To become available to users and administrators some objects need to be activated after being added This applies to the following object types printers dev servers srv Supervisors spv and gateways gtw For printers and gateways you can include in their definition that they are automatically activated on the corresponding host whenever Xprint V7 0 is started on this host in future option aa Servers are automatically activated U23841 J Z915 6 76 79 Administrative tasks under Xprint Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 whenever the host is started Supervisors are activated automatically when Xprint V7 0 is started if a printer they administer was configured with the aa option Objects are always activated using the xpchange command see section Changing the status of Xprint V7 0 objects on page 82 5 3 2 Deleting Xprint V7 0 objects With the xpdel command you can delete Xprint V7 0 objects from the Xprint V7 0 database The Xprint V7 0 administrator can delete all objects from the system with the exception of the Xprint V7 0 system object sys which cannot be deleted System and local Xprint V7 0 administrators can only delete those objects which are administered on the local host For a detailed description of using this command for each object type see the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual The following rules apply for deleting Xprint V7 0 objects Only Xprint V7 0 ob
128. e Xprint V7 0 database like printers servers etc but they are stored in the server spoolin directory In addition to the normal modification options as an administrator you can redirect all print jobs for a printer to another printer e Printers dev Xprint V7 0 can use printers of many different types U23841 J Z915 6 76 75 Xprint V7 0 architecture Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 The printers are controlled by a supervisor and assigned tools called backends A PCL is assigned to the printer The process of printing is controlled by a backend using the appropriate printer s PCL to provide printer details Xprint V7 0 provides a general purpose backend but additional specific backends can be defined by the administrator and incorporated into the Xprint V7 0 system For a description of how to define new backends refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual As the backend actually controls the printer it must interface with both the supervisor and the printer The backend initializes the printer port and the printer It sets the printer with any specified job options such as the typeface and style Furthermore it ensures that start end and separator sheets are printed if required It also makes sure that the requested number of copies of the document are printed For this printer specific information the backend refers to the PCL assigned to the printer Backend programs interpret status messages In
129. e deleted are selected e f references to the form are displayed you must remove these by modifying the displayed objects accordingly e Delete the form with the following command xpdel frm selection For selection you can either specify a list of form names or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the forms to be deleted are selected Examples To delete the forms invoicel and manual xpdel frm invoicel manual To delete all forms with the font font1 and the paper format A4 page width 210 mm page height 297 mm xpdel frm scl ft fontl pw 210m ph 297m U23841 J Z915 6 76 159 Administering forms Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 9 3 Modifying the attributes of a form You can modify the attributes of any form which you administer or which you are allowed to use The attributes of the default form GENERIC of Xprint V7 0 cannot be modified even by the system administrator e To modify the attributes of a form use the following command xpmod frm selection modifications For selection you can either specify a list of forms whose attributes you want to modify or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant forms are selected
130. e environments are available Environment definition Language En English De German Table 6 Language environment variables If the environment variable LANG is incorrectly or not at all defined Xprint V7 0 uses English as the default e Select the language on your local host as follows LANG language_ID export LANG For Janguage_ID you enter the abbreviation see above of the relevant language U23841 J Z915 6 76 87 Rules for configuring the system Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 5 4 Rules for configuring the system This section describes the basic rules which must be observed when config uring the Xprint V7 0 system it does not cover the actual steps that are required You should use these guidelines to check the configuration of your Xprint V7 0 system at regular intervals in order to maintain its performance 5 4 1 Defining an Xprint V7 0 domain The print manager must define the Xprint V7 0 domain with respect to the resources to be shared the number of hosts and some administration criteria Creating an Xprint V7 0 domain is always a compromise between the maximum number of hosts administered to provide a maximum of print resources the assignment of administrative tasks concerning print resources to a person or association e g resource locations company strategy anda high number of hosts which might slow Xprint V7 0 down so that there might
131. e familiar with in order to use this product It describes the objects comprising Xprint V7 0 and provides the basic knowledge you require for administering Xprint V7 0 5 1 Responsibilities To allow the privileges and tasks within Xprint V7 0 to be clearly delimited several types of Xprint V7 0 user are distinguished e users Xprint V7 0 users Users whether registered in the Xprint V7 0 database or not cannot admin ister any Xprint V7 0 objects besides their own print jobs e System administrator Every system administrator root of a system may also perform specific administrative tasks concerning Xprint V7 0 on his her system These tasks include starting and terminating Xprint V7 0 on the local system commands xpstart and xpstop Only the system administrator can start Xprint V7 0 activating and deactivating local printers supervisors and servers xpchange command setting up local Xprint V7 0 objects other than users and the Xprint V7 0 system xpadd command administering all local Xprint V7 0 objects commands xpmod and xpde1 defining local Xprint V7 0 administrators who can perform some of the tasks of the system administrator for the local host xpmod hos command e Local Xprint V7 0 administrator sub root Every system administrator can define one or more local Xprint V7 0 admin istrators who are responsible for administering the Xprint V7 0 system locally U23841 J
132. e host can be found U23841 J Z915 6 76 99 Administering hosts Configuring Xprint V7 0 li If a computer has been set up as a PARASITE host its supporting host must be running and Xprint V7 0 must be active on it for the PARASITE host to be able to access Xprint V7 0 Both systems must have the same hardware The administrator must make sure that the supporting host exports the var spool Xprint config DB directory to the PARASITE host and enters it in the parasite hos s directory under the same name The export and entry in the directory must be done manually by the administrator You can also specify additional options which above all affect the host hierarchy and which might depend on the network structure see the description of the command xpadd hos in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual e Ifthe Xprint V7 0 administrator is also to manage Xprint V7 0 from other hosts use the following command xpmod usr xprintadm hot host_names For host_names you specify all hosts on which the administrator is to be known e Log in to the new system as root e Define the Xprint V7 0 administrator as a system user there if required e g via the administrator interface sysadm e Configure the network services for the communication with Xprint V7 0 etc services file see section Configuring the local area network LAN on page 235 e Initialize the database on the new host with the following command var
133. e job You can only select print jobs which are still in a print queue There are several different ways of doing this This section describes how to select individual print jobs via the job s default identifier or how to select one or more print jobs via a selection criteria list The job identifier When you submit a print job it is placed in a print queue If your print job is accepted for printing Xprint V7 0 automatically returns unique IDs by which you can identify your print job in the print queue These IDs have the following formats lt local ID gt lt global ID gt or lt global ID gt lt permanent ID gt The local ID is a number specifying the serial number of the job for your host It can only be used on the host on which the print job was started U23841 J Z915 6 76 49 Selecting a print job Managing print jobs The global ID consists of the name of the server which processes the print job and a serial job number for this server This ID can be used from any host on which you are registered as a user The permanent ID is an extension of the local ID intended to be unique in time i e never reused for another job The permanent job ID is made of the client host name a counter that garantees the permanence of this identifier and the local ID Please refer to page 51 for a complete description of the permanent ID A job ID might for example read as follows lt 18 gt lt sel 9 7 gt In this example 18 i
134. e object type consisting of three characters e g job Furthermore you can select from the objects available of the selected object type e g in the case of the object type job you can select one or more specific print jobs Finally there are a number of options available for most commands which have an effect on the behavior of the individual commands For detailed information on the various Xprint V7 0 commands see the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Online help For every command you can call online help with the option This online help works on two levels command and option level If you call an Xprint V7 0 command followed by the option e g xpadd command level help will be displayed providing the general form of this command This type of help displays the objects supported by the command It also shows the options that are independent of the object type Not all the options are displayed however because these depend on the use of a command and an object together Option level help displays all the possible options of a specific object type used with an Xprint V7 0 command To call the online help at option level you must specify the command name as well as the relevant object type before the option e g xpshow dgr 16 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Printing files 3 2 Printing files This section describes the simplest way of printing files with Xprint V
135. e of migration from earlier version it is suggested to take a backup of the current DB before starting the installation U23841 J Z915 6 76 239 Installation new Installing Xprint V7 0 g Initializing the Xprint V7 0 database To be able to work correctly Xprint V7 0 requires a database This database can be initialized automatically as part of the Xprint V7 0 instal lation process The user is asked whether he she wants a database to be installed or not If the user responds with yes he she will be asked whether the database is to be installed in any case or only if an already existing database has been found to be defective If an initialization is started even though there is an old database this is backed up in the directory DB backup in any case no matter if defective or not To restore such a backup database you must first deactivate the Xprint V7 0 system Then you must delete the directory confi g DB and rename the directory config DB backup to config DB Automatic configuration of printers Xprint V7 0 offers the option of having printers configured automatically during installation of the packages If you select this option you will be asked to select one or more printers from a menu in the course of the installation process To find out which devices are supported see the section Supported printers and PCLs in the Reference Manual In the case of installations with cpio DBinstal1 must be called man
136. e opened quickly and rapid data transfer The required data transfer rate between hosts is in the order of megabits per second A typical example of such a network is Ethernet Different domains can be connected by slower networks possibly wide area networks as there is generally less traffic between domains than within a domain 98 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering hosts As a guideline experience has shown that there is a practical limit of 50 potential masters slave hosts in a single domain If there are too many potential master slave hosts it is difficult to keep all the databases updated If more than 50 hosts are needed then parasite hosts can be defined or the domain can be divided into a number of smaller domains Parasite hosts import the database from their supporting host potential master or slave by means of a file sharing utility e g NFS which needs to be set up by the administrator Parasite hosts depend on the supporting hosts as Xprint V7 0 cannot run on the parasite if it hasn t been started on the supporting host If you divide the original domain into several smaller domains printers that are now in a different domain can be accessed by prefixing their names with a gateway name If the devices must be accessed with the same name from every host independently of which host they belong to then this can be achieved by replicating the definition of the network devices in each domain
137. e xpshow command see above When the identifier list is empty or contains only then only LOCAL gateways will be looked for In other cases both LOCAL and PARTNER gateways will be looked for U23841 J Z915 6 76 233 8 Installing Xprint V7 0 This chapter describes how to install and configure Xprint V7 0 on a system 8 1 Considerations Before installing Xprint V7 0 you should define the individual parameters of the spooler configuration If you are not familiar with Xprint V7 0 you should first read the chapter Intro duction to Xprint V7 0 starting on page 5 to get acquainted with the concepts of Xprint V7 0 and to understand the basic terms used in this section In particular you should first define the following configuration parameters Number and names of the hosts planned for your Xprint V7 0 system Hierarchy of the hosts in your system i e which host you want to set up as the master host and which hosts as potential masters slaves or parasite hosts Number of servers and supervisors required for controlling all the printers and the hosts on which these are to be set up Be aware that Xprint V7 0 is a licensed product Its usage is protected by a software key If you do not have this key at installation time you can still start the product and use it with the full functionality during an evaluation period At the end of this period if no license has been installed you will no longer be able
138. ecovery rule proceed as follows e Make sure that the recovery rule is no longer used by any printers in the system xpshow rec rule_name diR where rule_name is the name of exactly one recovery rule A list is displayed containing all the objects which have direct or indirect references to the specified recovery rule e lfthere are any delete all the references of level 1 to the recovery rule in the system for example by canceling the assignment of the rule to the specified printer e Delete the recovery rule with the following command xpdel rec selection where selection is a list of recovery rules or a selection criteria list according to which the rules are selected 192 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering servers 6 15 Administering servers A server is responsible for scheduling print jobs and administering the job database Furthermore it controls the supervisors and printers which are assigned to it A server can have several supervisors assigned If you want to Read add a server section Adding a server on page 193 delete a server section Deleting a server on page 196 change the status of a server activate section Changing the status of a or deactivate a server server on page 197 modify the attributes of a server section Modifying the attributes of a server on page 198 Table 25 Administering servers 6 15 1 Adding a server
139. ed As already mentioned it is not possible to retrieve the device status from directly attached printers and the serial port driver on Windows also expects some initialization from the Spooler It is therefore advised to always define the serially connected devices in both Xprint V7 0 and the native Spooler 9 3 6 Logging On Windows Xprint V7 0 records its logging information in the system event log The logging messages can be retrieved with the Event Viewer Start Programs Administrative Tools Common Event Viewer The messages can be found in the Application category menu item Log Application The logged messages are the same as on UNIX 9 3 7 Interoperability with the BS2000 DPRINT system It is possible to exchange print requests between Xprint V7 0 on Windows and the BS2000 DPRINT print system The only requirement is to install the file transfer product openFT on the Windows machine where the LOCAL Xprint V7 0 gateway GIP2 is running 254 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Xprint V7 0 for Windows Differences from Xprint V7 0 UNIX Be careful the minimal version of openFT supported is the 6 0C00 and this product must be installed in multi user mode To configure the openFT product and GIP2 gateways please refer to the manuals of this product The specific Windows operations to be performed are the following ones Concerning openFT a password must be provided to openFT in order to enable the asynchroneous file
140. either this must be the Xprint V7 0 administrator or the object must be local p o U23841 J Z915 6 76 69 Xprint V7 0 architecture Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 5 2 Xprint V7 0 architecture Xprint V7 0 is an object oriented system consisting of various objects As an administrator you can define modify delete and if appropriate activate and deactivate Xprint V7 0 objects The following figure shows the most important Xprint V7 0 components and how these interact The architecture of Xprint User interface A P m Backend Services Client Supervisor lt gt Server gt P Data transfer Scheduler Output API Xprint management services API Managed objects Figure 10 Xprint V7 0 architecture The client xpadd command or API function requests the printing of a job This job is directly processed by the server except in the case of what is called direct printing The server passes the printout on to a suitable supervisor which itself communicates with the printer via the backend assigned to the printer The following section provides a more detailed description of the available objects Almost all the Xprint V7 0 commands can be used with the different object types 70 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Xprint
141. elated publications Index Contents ee h h h h Ponh Preface yi eet Bota emo a E Be ye Bok A 1 Target gQroupS ea c ta vitae aE ey ee 1 Structure ofthe manual 2 45 2 Notational conventions 22 02004 3 Other publications inthisset 4 Introduction to XprintV7 0 5 Xprint V7 0 from the user s point of view 5 Mercator sori a dag bie eee Ge eae eae a the A 8 Xprint V7 0 R Skit 2 2 2 2 2 02220202202 ee 8 Xprint V7 0 elements 0 200002 eee 8 Xprint V7 0 objects 2 2 a a 9 Options for printing documents 13 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 15 Basic information aoaaa a 15 Printing files ewe ase we ee eae 8 wR a i 17 Selectingaprinter 2 2 2000 19 Using Xprint V7 0 options 2 202 0004 21 Printing parts ofa document 21 Printing files with special content types 23 Creating printouts with special formats 24 Using Loadable Resources 24 30 Using Public Loadable Resources 31 Using Private Loadable Resources 32 Copying print files before printing and deleting them after printing 33 Defining separator pages 0 34 Printing several copies of adocument 35 Requesting notification of the result 36 Using further options
142. encrypted by user supervisor The file d bills july prt is encrypted by user revisor On Xprint V7 0 the accounts amp passwords for user editor have been registered in the default dat file The users revisor and supervisor are registered in the users dat file Assuming that manager supervisor and revisor have read write access to the files in the d bills subdirectory and that the cp option will not be used The user manager can print the file d bills june prt 256 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Xprint V7 0 for Windows Limitations and restrictions The user supervisor can print the files d bills april prt and d bills june prt The user revisor can print the files d bills july prt and d bills june prt See reference guide for a complete description of xpsetuser command Migrated files Migrated files are located on removable storage media To access such files the user intervention is sometimes required to confirm the recall of the files and or to mount the required removable storage medium Consequently migrated files can only be printed using the cp option that permits making a copy of submitted files using the user account In that case the user would be invited to confirm the recall of the files immediately after issuing the xpadd command If the required storage medium is not yet mounted the user is also invited to mount it If the cp option is
143. ers access to a printer on page 148 grant or deny specific users access to a printer group section Granting or denying specific users access to a printer group on page 149 grant or deny specific users access to a form section Granting or denying specific users access to a form on page 149 grant or deny specific printers access to a form section Granting or denying specific printers access to a form on page 150 allow or reject specific administrators as supervisor administrators section Allowing or prohibiting admin istration of supervisors on page 151 Table 15 Administering permission lists U23841 J Z915 6 76 143 Administering permission lists Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 7 1 Creating a permission list If you want to create a new permission list you have two options you can either create a new permission list from scratch or you can copy an existing one and modify it Creating a new permission list To create a new permission list proceed as follows e Login as the Xprint V7 0 administrator e Create a new permission list with the following command xpadd prm list_name list pt FORM ca comment where list_name is the unique name of the permission list and zist is the list of users or forms to be included in the permission list list can have the following format al user_list if it is to be an allowed list dn user_list if it is to be a
144. ervices file on the BSD host you must specify the relevant port number here e The port number is very important as no two gateways with the same port l number can run at the same time on a system The option np TCP defines that the TCP IP protocol is used No other protocol can be specified For the connection to BSD printer spoolers the print protocol must be selected with the option pp BSD With the aa option you can define that the gateway is activated automatically each time Xprint V7 0 is started The option op option_list can be used to adjust the behavior of the local gateway The following options values are possible MODE COMPATIBLE This option is used to send requests to a BSD server It requires the local gateway to act as a SUN BSD 1p client This option must be specified if jobs are rejected by remote BSD 1pd daemons for no obvious reason For example for all local gateways defined in bl the option MODE COMPATIBLE must be set if the partner gateway represents an ATT 1p spooler system Pl lt first_port_number_client gt PA lt last_port_number_client gt These two options are important for receiving requests from remote BSD clients The two values define the port range the remote BSD client must use for sending jobs to the local gateway or receiving jobs from it Default values are PI 721 and PA 731 216 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Gateways GTW_START_PAGE YES NO
145. ervisors can be defined independently gateways can be configured for interdomain printing and an Xprint V7 0 daemon and database manager run during the Xprint V7 0 session This approach simplifies the integration of the Windows computers into an existing Xprint V7 0 UNIX configuration a Windows print server can be added in an Xprint V7 0 domain exactly like a plain UNIX host Windows computers can be defined as potential masters or slaves and the whole domain can still be administered from a single point UNIX or Windows For the daily Xprint V7 0 management tasks the print system administrator does not even need to know which hosts are UNIX and which Windows The type of platform hosting the print server is also totally transparent to the end users and the applications submitting print requests For Windows users printing from graphical applications word processors spreadsheets Wprint can be used to route the print jobs to Xprint V7 0 with the optional possibility of specifying Xprint V7 0 job parameters or setting default ones The full set of Xprint V7 0 commands is also available on Windows and can be called from a DOS shell window The xpadd command for example can still be used to print a pre formatted file received by mail U23841 J Z915 6 76 249 Requirements Xprint V7 0 for Windows 9 2 Requirements Xprint V7 0 is designed to run on Windows NT Server 4 0 Windows 2000 Server or on Windows 2000 Advanced Server
146. es No Connected printers Type Name Port type Device address Supervisor name Supervisors used Name Server name Host name Figure 19 Worksheet 260 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Appendix Worksheet Filling out the worksheet You should fill out a separate worksheet for every host in the network that is to use the distributed spooler system First enter the name of the relevant host in the network in the top left field Host name The computer will later be entered as an Xprint V7 0 host under this name In the field to the right of it you can enter the location of the computer for your reference Then find out the overall disk capacity in Mbytes for the relevant host and the free capacity in percent You need this information to decide whether this host is to receive a copy of the Xprint V7 0 database or not Together with the responsible system administrator you can then define whether a copy is to be made or not The database must be stored on at least one of the computers in the network To guarantee availability however it is advisable to have several copies in the network In addition hosts which do not hold a copy of the database what are called parasite hosts can only use Xprint V7 0 if the supporting host assigned to them is running with the database In addition the processor architecture Intel RISC of the parasite and the supporting host must be identical The database is then shared via a network file
147. es as a guide through this section If you want to Read print a document on a specific device section Selecting a printer on page 19 print parts of a document section Printing parts of a document on page 21 print a document with special data not section Printing files with special suitable for the printer content types on page 23 Table 2 Options for controlling the printing process U23841 J Z915 6 76 17 Printing files Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 If you want to Read print a document with a specific appearance section Creating printouts with special formats on page 24 print the current state of the document section Copying print files before printing and deleting them after printing on page 33 add separator pages between documents or files section Defining separator pages on page 34 print several copies of a document section Printing several copies of a document on page 35 be notified of the completion of your print job or of other events section Requesting notification of the result on page 36 print a document using further Xprint V7 0 options section Using further options on page 37 print a document using predefined fonts or forms section Using other Xprint V7 0 objects on page 41 print a document using loadable resources section Using R
148. es how to add recovery rules to the Xprint V7 0 system To define a new recovery rule proceed as follows e Change to the recovery rule directory RR in the Xprint V7 0 directory on your computer by default you require system administrator privileges to be able to edit files in this directory cd var spool Xprint config RR e Create a new file for the new recovery rule with a text editor vi my_RR rec To do this use any editor that can edit pure ASCII files e g vi 1 You can choose any name for this file 186 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering recovery rules e Enter your recovery rules in the file using the following format Every line of the source file defines one recovery rule Comment lines must start with the hash character in the first column Use the following format to define recovery rules error_code maximum_time Lexception_rule_ID list_of_actions The specifications for the fields in square brackets may be omitted but the colons for separating the fields are mandatory error_code is the key under which the recovery rule files are to be accessed It can contain either an Xprint V7 0 printer error code or an action for handling a recurring error This field is mandatory The following printer error codes are supported Error code Description Default action TonerEmpty Toner empty Retry Parity Parity error durin
149. escribed as follows FORM f A filter is activated the line spacing vertical motion being specified in inches as with the 1pii option V_MOTION i Ipii 1 or in centimeters as with the 1 pic option V_MOTION c Ipic 1 Anothe V_MOTION C CLoiJ Ipi 2 M A filter is required which supports the enlargement of the printed text by a variable factor In this case the filter should be called with the option mX where X specifies an enlargement factor between 1 and 9 The filter can be defined with the following option possibility is as follows MODES bigger C1 9 m 1 The same can be achieved by using the corresponding option of the xpadd job command you can set the enlargement factor 3 for example with sm bigger 3 164 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering filters Creating a new fast filter e Enter the following command to add a new fast filter for use in Xprint V7 0 xpadd flt filter_name tp FAST cm command options For filter_name specify the name of the new filter You must use a name which does not yet exist in the system otherwise the command will be rejected With tp specify FAST For command you must specify the path name of the executable file of the filter program The path name must be the same on all host computers on which the filter is stored If the absolute path name is not specified the executable filter file is searched for
150. esources in the Reference Manual print a document using a predefined job template section Printing a document via a globally defined job template on page 44 print a document with a private job template section Defining customized job templates on page 46 Table 2 Options for controlling the printing process 18 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Selecting a printer 3 3 Selecting a printer Xprint V7 0 allows you to print documents on any printer within your Xprint V7 0 domain You can select any printer for your printout for which you have the required privileges There are two possible ways of selecting printers or printer groups for printing in Xprint V7 0 Firstly you can specify one specific printer group for a print job and secondly you can define one or more printers as your personal default printers If you do not specify a specific printer group for your print job Xprint V7 0 will select a suitable printer according to the options specified for the print job e g double sided printing landscape format Specifying a printer or printer group for a print job You can select the printer on which you want to print your document according to various criteria There are the following options de destination This option allows you to select a printer or printer group If you select a printer group Xprint V7 0 sends your job to a device which be
151. ey do not match Xprint V7 0 will try to convert the print job data into a format suitable for the printer If you do not specify a content type the following will occur automatically e Xprint V7 0 will read the start of the data If are the very first characters or the string 4 PS occurs in the first 15 characters then the content type will be set to POSTSCRIPT e fthis is not the case and only SIMPLE characters are detected in the first 15 characters then the content type is set to SIMPLE U23841 J Z915 6 76 23 Using Xprint V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 e Otherwise the content type is set to COMPATIBLE If you are printing more than one document then the content type than is deter mined for the first document will be used for all the other documents in the job 3 4 3 Creating printouts with special formats Usually a printer is not only capable of printing data on paper but can also do this in different formats Therefore Xprint V7 0 also allows you to influence the formatting by specifying font settings the page format and the character set to be used Printing a document with different font settings The following options allow you to change the default font for a printout What you can modify depends on the printer you use If you use the xpshow pcl command and specify the PCL set for the selected printer you can display a list of the fonts styles character pitches etc that are sup
152. eyword pattern replacement There is only one blank between the context sensitive keyword and the pattern The equals sign is not enclosed in blanks An equals sign within the pattern must be escaped by a preceding backslash keyword specifies what must be considered when the option is generated The permitted keywords are listed in the table in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Each keyword represents context sensitive attributes which must match the pattern when the option is generated pattern defines when the option is to be generated It may be a value an asterisk or a regular expression If pattern matches the actual values extracted with the keyword the option is generated Otherwise no option is passed on to the filter U23841 J Z915 6 76 163 Administering filters Configuring Xprint V7 0 replacement describes how the option is to be passed on to the filter It can be extracted from the actual values which may be hidden behind keyword with the help of regular expressions amp and the combina tions and n replacement may also contain an asterisk which is replaced by the entire pattern i e it is the same as amp Examples A user submits a job with the special mode sm express The slow filter supporting this mode is activated with the x option The description for this option reads as follows MODES express x A filter is activated by the option f form_name This option is d
153. f consumed print jobs e You can change the number of print jobs a user has consumed i e printed with the cj option xpchange usr selection cj new_consumed_jobs If selection is not specified the command refers to all the users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the user s for whom the changed print quotas are to apply or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant users are selected The variable new_consumed_jobs represents the new counter value for the consumed jobs of the relevant user Now the user can print again until the maximum number of allowed print jobs is reached Once the user has consumed this number of print jobs any further jobs will be rejected Examples To reset the number of consumed pages for users jones and brown to 0 xpchange usr jones brown cp 0 U23841 J Z915 6 76 139 Administering users Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 6 7 Displaying information on users Xprint V7 0 offers the option of displaying information on the defined users You can display the user privileges as well as the current state of the assigned print quotas Displaying privileges and print quotas e To display privileges and print quotas of users in the spooler system enter xpshow usr selection di display If selection is not s
154. filters 2 000 162 Adding filters 2 0 2 00 00 0000 00 00 4 162 Deleting filters 0 02020004 167 Modifying the attributes of a filter 0 168 Assigning a filter to a printer 0 169 Removing a filter from a printer aoaaa aaa 170 Administering public loadable resources 171 Defining a loadable resource 2 171 Deleting a loadable resource onoo a 173 Displaying the definition of a loadable resource 173 Administering global job templates 174 Defining a job template o oo a 174 Deleting a job template aooaa a 177 Customizing job templates oaoa oa 177 Administering PCLS aaaea aa 179 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Contents 6 13 1 6 13 2 6 13 3 6 13 4 6 13 5 6 14 6 14 1 6 14 2 6 14 3 6 14 4 6 14 5 6 15 6 15 1 6 15 2 6 15 3 6 15 4 6 16 6 16 1 6 16 2 6 16 3 6 16 4 7 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 7 3 5 7 4 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 4 4 7 4 5 8 1 8 3 Addi g a PCL acce a warga a a Ta Gee eae Wh a a E 180 DeletingaPCL spg pataia ot aa aa eO a a a Doka 181 Assigning a comment toa PCL 182 Assigning a PCL to a printer aooaa aaa aa 183 DefiningaPCLyourself 04 185 Administering recovery rules 186 Defining arecoveryrule 000004 186 Assigning a recovery ruletoaprinter
155. for Intel processors and compatible platforms We do not recommend you to run Xprint V7 0 on Windows NT Workstation or Windows 2000 Professional The intrinsic restrictions on the number of connec tions that can be simultaneously open on these operating systems cause Xprint V7 0 to be relatively unstable 9 3 Differences from Xprint V7 0 UNIX The Xprint V7 0 manuals describe Xprint V7 0 on UNIX In general their contents also apply to Xprint V7 0 on Windows However there are a number of differences due to the nature of the operating systems and these differences are described in this section 9 3 1 Installation and license key The installation of Xprint V7 0 for Windows conforms to the standards for this platform a setup wizard guides you in the successive steps of the installation The wizard is automatically started when you introduce the CD ROM medium If the wizard does not appear start it manually by executing D setup if D is your CD ROM drive Wprint the client program to print from Windows applica tions can optionally be installed along with Xprint V7 0 During the installation you will be prompted for the Xprint V7 0_db entry This entry identifies the TCP port number for the Xprint V7 0 database It is automat ically added to the file ZSystemRoot system32 drivers etc services Xprint V7 0 must be installed on a local hard drive The network shared drives are not supported Be careful that temporary files will be
156. for Xprint V7 0 users than for users Xprint V7 0 users can access their print jobs from all the hosts for which they are registered They can be assigned a security level and thus be granted access to devices with a corresponding security level Print quotas can be defined for the number of jobs or print pages allowed thus preventing users from making unlimited numbers of printouts Filters f1t Filters have the function of converting the data sent to the device by the user into the format required by the device This makes it possible for example to print normal ASCII files on PostScript printers as Xprint V7 0 is supplied with the filter vppost Two types of filter are distinguished under Xprint V7 0 slow filters which are executed before the Xprint V7 0 process and fast filters which are used to provide a link to objects other than standard compo nents U23841 J Z915 6 76 11 Xprint V7 0 elements Introduction to Xprint V7 0 e Fonts fnt Font types supported by the printers in use can be easily accessed through the definition of fonts e Job templates jtp Job templates serve to simplify the use of frequent print commands by allowing the options of the xpadd command which must normally be specified individually to be combined in groups These can then be specified via the job template e Loadable resources 1rs Loadable resources allow faster printing of jobs that use the same ba
157. form If you want to grant only specific users access to a form you can assign a permission list to the form To do this proceed as follows e Select a suitable allowed list containing exactly those users who are to be granted access to the form or select a denied list containing all those users who are to be denied access to the form A list of all permission lists can be displayed with the following command xpshow prm If there is no suitable list defined in the Xprint V7 0 system you can create one yourself see section Creating a permission list on page 144 U23841 J Z915 6 76 149 Administering permission lists Configuring Xprint V7 0 e Assign the selected permission list to the desired form xpmod frm selection up list_name where selection is the name of one or more forms If it is not specified all forms are modified Otherwise you can either specify a list of the forms to which you want to assign a permission list or you can define a selection criteria list according to which the relevant forms are selected list_name is the name of the selected permission list 6 7 7 Granting or denying specific printers access to a form If you want to grant only specific printers access to a form you can assign a permission list to the form To do this proceed as follows e Select a suitable allowed list containing exactly those printers which are to be granted access to the form or select a denied list contain
158. form on page 158 modify the attributes of a form section Modifying the attributes of a form on page 160 assign a form to a printer section Default forms for printers on page 160 grant or deny specific users access to section Granting or denying specific a form users access to a form on page 149 grant or deny specific printers access section Granting or denying specific to a form printers access to a form on page 150 Table 17 Administering forms 156 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering forms 6 9 1 Adding a form Under Xprint V7 0 you can define any number of forms There are two possible ways of defining forms you can either define a new form from scratch or you can copy an existing form and modify it Defining a new form from scratch e f you want to define a default font for the form check first whether this font is available in the system To do this display all the defined fonts using the following command xpshow fnt Or search for the desired font font_name with the command xpshow fnt font_name e Check whether the PCL of your target printer supports the desired attributes of the new form xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG e Now define the new form using the following command xpadd frm form_name attributes For form_name specify the name of the form attributes represents a list of attributes the form is to have Every entry in this list consists of an option a
159. formation is taken from the data passing through the backend Some printers can respond to special information requests from backend programs To enable the user to interact with the active print job e g to delete or suspend the job a special mechanism allows signals to be exchanged between the supervisor and the backend Permission lists enable printer access to be restricted to explicitly defined users and you can define which forms can be assigned to this printer By means of a security level printers can be restricted to users with an appro priate security level for printing confidential data Printer groups dgr Printers can be combined to form what are called printer groups to achieve better loading of all the printers in the group If a print job is sent to a printer group it is printed on the first printer to become available in the printer group Recovery rules rec Recovery rules are used to describe how specific printer conditions are handled Recovery rules are defined in a source file and saved in the Xprint V7 0 database after compilation Then they can be assigned to the printers The default recovery procedure in the case of a printer error can be overridden by a recovery rule In the case of the printer error paper_end for example the Xprint V7 0 system tries by default to print the job until the 76 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Xprint V7 0 architecture paper su
160. fujitsu siemens com Comments Suggestions Corrections Submitted by Comments on Xprint V7 0 User s and Administrator s Guide U23841 J Z915 6 76 Fujitsu Siemens Computers GmbH User Documentation 33094 Paderborn Germany Fax 49 700 372 00001 email manuals fujitsu siemens com http manuals fujitsu siemens com Comments Suggestions Corrections Submitted by Comments on Xprint V7 0 User s and Administrator s Guide U23841 J Z915 6 76
161. g e Xprint V7 0 Local Xprint V7 0 runs on a single host and not in a domain This license level includes all the interfaces including Mercator and the API the printing services possibility of configuring servers and supervisors and the attachment of BSD Printers BSD fast filter on one isolated host Gateways only support incoming requests from Wprint Any other interdomain operation requires the Net Server license see below Xprint V7 0 Local is basically limited to a maximum of 2 devices but device upgrade licenses can be added to increase this limit e Xprint V7 0 Net Client This level offers all the Xprint V7 0 interfaces including Mercator and the API It does not include the possibility of configuring devices on the host Xprint V7 0 Net Client hosts can only be configured with SLAVE or PARASITE responsibility This does not prevent the administration of the Xprint V7 0 domain from a Net Client it merely prevents the host from becoming master of the database Net Clients can submit jobs to other domains Gateways configured on an Xprint V7 0 Net Client can only accept requests from Wprint and cannot be used for output e Xprint V7 0 Net Server This level includes the features of Xprint V7 0 Net Client and adds the possi bility of setting up devices on the host configuring the host as POTENTIAL MASTER and executing fully operational gateways At least one Xprint V7 0 Net Server license is required in an Xprint V7 0 domain T
162. g command xpstat dev selection If the printer is still active output State ACTIVE you must deactivate it before modifying it xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE Then modify the printer definition using the following command xpmod dev device_name da device_file co type where device_name is the name of the printer whose definition is to be modified Depending on the type device_file specifies to which port the printer is attached e g dev term tty001 or dev term tty002 for serial or dev 1p0 or dev 1p1 for parallel ports or which LAN address and port 122 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering devices number apply for a LAN printer e g 132 82 127 34 9100 as the Internet address for your LAN printer Instead of the Internet address and port number you can also specify the host name provided it is defined in the etc hosts file If the connection type changes e g up to now the first serial port now the second parallel port you must also specify with type the new connection type your printer will use Possible values for type are SERIAL for a serial port PARALLEL for a parallel port SCSI for a SCSI high performance printer and LAN for a LAN printer 6 4 7 Replacing an existing printer with a new one If you want to replace an existing printer with a new one you only have to change the relevant information in the definition of the old printer What infor mation this is
163. g the individual parameters in one string In addition to the options of the xpadd job command the following options can be used lj to display the local job ID id to display both the local and global job IDs gj to display the global job ID pj to display the permanent job ID By default both the local and the global job identifier are output first in two separate columns To override this you can use the id option If you want these identifiers to be output at a different position insert id at the position you want in the parameter list Furthermore specifying 1j or gj also overrides the default output of both identifiers e The options te and sx of the xpadd job command cannot be used as l they do not correspond to an attribute of the job definition Displaying attributes using display templates If you frequently use specific attributes for the display of print jobs you can define a template containing all these attributes Then to obtain a display you only call the name of this template i e you do not have to specify a list of attributes each time The template is stored in the special file Xprint V7 0 in your login directory e Use the following command to call a display template xpshow di display_template 56 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Managing print jobs Displaying print jobs where display_template represents the name of the template you want to use Defining a display template
164. g transfer Ignore PaperEnd Paper empty Retry Stop Printer stopped Retry PowerOff Printer switched off Restart CoverOpen _ Printer cover open Retry PaperJam Paper jam Retry Hangup I O system call interrupted due to hardware Retry failure NoAck Time out during ETX ACK protocol Retry Table 23 Supported printer error codes maximum_time is an option which must be specified together with the exception_rule_ID field It activates the selection of a specific action if an error keeps recurring By default the value INFINITE is used The value must lie between 0 and 65535 seconds If the error persists after this time Xprint V7 0 selects the action specified in the field exception_rule_ID You can set a printer automatically to the status NOT_ACTIVE for example if the paper supply is not refilled within the specified time U23841 J Z915 6 76 187 Administering recovery rules Configuring Xprint V7 0 exception_rule_ID is also optional and if used must be specified with the field maximum_time t may consist of any combination of letters and digits blanks are not allowed The field must contain a reference to a suitable entry in the error_code field which itself specifies an action list_of_actions specifies the actions to be taken if a specific error occurs If two or more actions are specified the individual actions must be separated by blanks The following actions can be specified Action Desc
165. gateway 233 Installing Xprint V7 0 0 008 235 Considerations 2 0 2 0 0 00 a 235 Configuring the local area network LAN 235 Setting the language for the Xprint V7 0 system 236 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Contents 8 4 Installation new 2 0 2 237 8 4 1 Installing withcpio 0 2 02 2 000 238 8 4 2 Installing withpkgadd 2 0 238 8 4 3 Installing with sd method 239 8 5 Installation users only 0202004 241 8 5 1 Installation with pkgadd aoa 242 8 5 2 Productlicensing 2 0 2000 243 8 5 3 Types of licenses 1 ee ee 243 8 5 4 Installing a license key 2 2 0 0 00 245 9 Xprint V7 0 for Windows 249 9 1 Approach 4 ee ee ee Bo ee Se Ses 249 9 2 Requirements 02 0002 ee eee ee ee 250 9 3 Differences from Xprint V7 0 UNIX 250 9 3 1 Installation and license key 250 9 3 2 Integration with Wprint 2 2 ee 251 9 3 3 Start up and shutdown 02 050800 e 252 9 3 4 Responsibilities 0 000000 000s 252 9 3 5 Printer support 2 2 ee ee eee 253 9 3 6 LOJJING 2 2 fe Ault 2 ined Gen Ae nok Je EOS Ba tte Aa 254 9 3 7 Interoperability with the BS2000 DPRINT system 254 9 3 8 WINDOWS 2000 special files 255 9 4 Limitations and restrictions
166. ge formats the layup portrait or landscape font appearance of the information pages and user privileges Xprint V7 0 differentiates between automatic and manual forms Jobs using automatic forms can be printed at any time these forms are mounted on the printer by default and usually only define the hopper page format margins or the font If a specific form requires that special paper be mounted in the printer manually or that a font cassette be changed a manual form makes sure that the job is only printed when the printer has been prepared You can define modify or delete forms Furthermore you can use permission lists to restrict the use of a specific form to specific users e Gateways gtw 72 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Xprint V7 0 architecture Gateways allow you to make a connection from one Xprint V7 0 domain to another Xprint V7 0 domain or to other spooler systems Via these gateways you can use the printers and printer groups of the other system involved Gateways to other Xprint V7 0 domains simplify the administration of Xprint V7 0 in very large networks In this way the hosts of the entire network can be distributed over different Xprint V7 0 domains e g by department so that there is one Xprint V7 0 administrator for each domain who only has to administer a reduced number of Xprint V7 0 objects Gateways to DPRINT spooler system for BS2000 systems or BSD spooler systems
167. hapter describes how to configure Xprint V7 0 on your system It comprises various sections each dealing with different activities The following table will help you to quickly find the section you need If you want to Read manage hosts section Administering hosts on page 96 add a predefined printer to Xprint V7 0 section Configuring predefined printers on page 109 manage any devices you choose section Administering devices on page 114 manage device groups section Administering printer groups on page 126 manage users section Administering users on page 133 make use of Xprint V7 0 s security facilities section Administering permission lists on page 143 manage fonts section Administering fonts on page 152 manage forms section Administering forms manage filters section Administering filters on page 162 manage loadable resources section Administering public loadable resources on page 171 manage job templates section Administering global job templates on page 174 manage PCLs section Administering PCLs on page 179 manage recovery rules section Administering recovery rules on page 186 manage servers section Administering servers on page 193 manage supervisors section Administering supervisors on page 200 Table 7 Config
168. he Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual U23841 J Z915 6 76 71 Xprint V7 0 architecture Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 e Fonts fnt Usually various fonts are available for printing your documents under Xprint V7 0 These are composed of the following attributes typeface e g Courier Helvetica Times Roman etc style straight or italic horizontal character pitch number of characters per inch centimeter line spacing number of lines per inch centimeter print quality draft or correspondence quality character set German English International USA etc So that you do not have to specify the desired attributes for each individual print job Xprint V7 0 allows you to predefine various fonts You select the desired attributes and store them under a font name If you want to print a document using these specific font attributes you only need to request them via this font name and Xprint V7 0 will apply them automatically to the print job Xprint V7 0 provides a default font GENERIC that has the following attributes no specific character type straight a character pitch of 10 characters per inch line spacing of 6 lines per inch and the character set INTERNATIONAL This font must not be modified nor deleted not even by the Xprint V7 0 administrator e Forms frm Forms are a convenient way of influencing the appearance of print jobs Forms can be used to define paper and pa
169. he backend program i e their main function is to detect feedback messages from the printer and to pass them on to the responsible supervisor in a form it can understand They are executed between the supervisor and the printer when the job is being printed Filter A filter is a program which enhances the functionality of Xprint V7 0 The system differentiates between fast filters and slow filters Font Fonts are Xprint V7 0 objects which combine the different pieces of font information typeface style character pitch line spacing print quality and character set under one name Form This is an Xprint V7 0 object with which you can have documents output in a predefined layout U23841 J Z915 6 76 273 Glossary Gateway Gateways are Xprint V7 0 objects which allow the connection of an Xprint V7 0 domain with different systems other Xprint V7 0 domains BSD UNIX systems etc Jobs can be exported as well as imported via gateways There may be several gateways running simultaneously on one host HOME directory This is the directory in which a user is located after logging in to the Outputware system Host This is the central computer to which the terminals and printers of the users are connected Under Xprint V7 0 every computer defined in an Xprint V7 0 domain is referred to as a host Hosts are divided into three categories master slave and parasite hosts The difference lies in the way each one handles the X
170. he following table serves as a guide to this section If you want to Read add a new filter section Adding filters on page 162 delete a filter section Deleting filters on page 167 modify filter attributes section Modifying the attributes of a filter on page 168 assign a filter to a printer section Assigning a filter to a printer on page 169 remove a filter from a printer section Removing a filter from a printer on page 170 Table 18 Administering filters 6 10 1 Adding filters With the xpadd f1t command you can add a new filter to your system A filter can be added with specific attributes e g input and output data formats and special modes The filters suitable for a job are selected according to these attributes There are two possible ways of adding a new slow or fast filter you can either create a filter from scratch by setting all the required options yourself or you can copy a similar filter and modify the relevant options As already mentioned you can choose between slow and fast filters By default the system uses slow filters tp SLOW To use fast filters you must always specify the tp FAST option Creating a new slow filter e To add anew slow filter for use in the Xprint V7 0 system enter the following command xpadd flt filter_name cm command it input_content_type ot output_content_type op options 162 U23841 J Z915 6 76
171. he number of U23841 J Z915 6 76 243 Installation users only Installing Xprint V7 0 devices in a domain is basically limited to 32 independently of the number of Net Clients and Net Servers This limit can be increased with device upgrade licenses Device upgrade licenses These licenses can be installed to increase the number of devices that can be configured in Xprint V7 0 Without printer upgrade license a host with Xprint V7 0 Local is limited to two devices while a domain is limited to 32 devices e Device Upgrade to 32 can be added to Xprint V7 0 Local and extends the number of devices that can be defined on the host to 32 e Device Upgrade to 128 can be added to Xprint V7 0 Local or in an Xprint V7 0 domain and extends the number of devices to 128 e Device Upgrade to 256 can be added to Xprint V7 0 Local or in an Xprint V7 0 domain and extends the number of devices to 256 e Unlimited Device Upgrade can be added to Xprint V7 0 Local or in an Xprint V7 0 domain and removes all limits on the number of devices Extra feature licenses These licenses protect very specific parts of the product e Xprint V7 0 R 3 Kit This license is required for execution of the client component of the Xprint V7 0 R S kit Other special feature licenses exist but are restricted to specific platforms or environments Site license This license can be combined with any of the functional features It allows you to use
172. he server of the local host by the assignment of the new supervisor colorado to the server nashua of the remote host nile 202 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering supervisors 6 16 2 Activating or deactivating supervisors You can change the status of any supervisor you administer A supervisor can assume three status values ACTIVE SHUTDOWN and NOT_ACTIVE SHUTDOWN means that the status NOT_ACTIVE has been requested for the supervisor but has not yet been reached The status needs to be changed above all in two cases 1 If a new supervisor is added to the Xprint V7 0 system its status is automat ically set to NOT_ACTIVE For the supervisor to be able to perform its functions it must be set to the status ACTIVE 2 If you want to delete a supervisor or modify its attributes you must first deactivate it status NOT_ACTIVE A supervisor with the status ACTIVE cannot be deleted nor modified i If you deactivate a supervisor with xpchange spv selection st NOT_ACTIVE all the printers assigned to it are also deactivated If you activate a supervisor with xpchange spv selection the printers assigned to it are not activated automatically e To change the status of a supervisor enter the following command xpchange spv selection st status For selection you can either specify a list of the supervisors you want to activate or deactivate or you can use the sc 1 selection_criteria_list optio
173. he supervisor xpchange spv selection st NOT_ACTIVE For selection you can either specify a list of the supervisors to be deactivated or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant supervisors are selected If selection is not specified all supervisors are deactivated e Check whether the supervisor is referenced by any other objects xpshow spv supervisor_name diR Cancel any existing references How to do this is described in the sections dealing with assigning a supervisor to the relevant object e g to a printer e Delete the supervisor xpdel spv selection Examples To deactivate and delete the supervisor del aware xpchange spv delaware st NOT_ACTIVE xpdel spv delaware To deactivate and delete all supervisors with the comment please_delete xpchange spv scl ca please_delete st NOT_ACTIVE xpdel spv scl ca please_delete U23841 J Z915 6 76 205 7 interoperability This chapter describes how you can interact with other spooler systems 7 1 Introduction Xprint V7 0 allows you to interact with other spooler systems The following figure illustrates the various possibilities F Xprint BSD UNIX Mainframes i Novell Netware Windows NT usw Np Xprin
174. hese jobs have been performed For this purpose Xprint V7 0 provides the xpmount command which sends this information to Xprint V7 0 Printing a document with a MANUAL form To print a document with a MANUAL form proceed as follows Submit the print job and select the required form xpadd job dr file fm form Prepare the target printer accordingly Now tell the system that the form is mounted and printing can thus be started Use the following command xpmount By means of menus the system then asks you to specify the mounted form and target printer see example When the required specifications are made the system starts printing the document The xpmount command also provides the options f form d printer and s silent mode i e the user is not asked for mount confirmation this allows you to avoid the menu selection by explicitly specifying the relevant values If you need to print with normal settings again make the required changes on the printer Notify the system of this xpmount f d printer where the option d printer i e the printer from which the form was removed must be specified U23841 J Z915 6 76 41 Using other Xprint V7 0 objects Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Examples To display all defined forms xpshow frm A list of all the available forms is displayed which might read as follows Name Default font Layup User perm Mount method GENERIC GENERIC
175. igure 213 deactivate 230 delete 229 F obtain information 233 fax 5 type LOCAL 214 files type PARTNER 214 select for printing 17 use 19 filters 162 GENERIC default font 154 155 add 162 GENERIC default form 156 158 assign toa printer 169 160 define 165 GENERIC default PCL 179 282 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Index H high availability configurations special features 102 host configure 105 configure new 98 105 delete user 135 enter user 134 parasite 99 106 host hierarchy 99 106 l identifier global identifier 49 format 50 local identifier 49 format 49 information on gateway 233 on objects 82 installation Windows NT 250 J job identifier 50 job template 174 add on remote host 175 customize 177 define 46 174 delete 177 display 45 simplified definition 175 use 44 K key license 243 L LAN configure 235 LANG 87 license 243 251 basic 243 device upgrade 244 extra feature 244 installing 245 site 244 line spacing 72 loadable resources administering 74 171 defining 171 deleting 173 display definition of 173 private 32 public 31 using 30 local gateway 214 logging 85 Ip X Open command 17 M Migrated files 257 modify filter attributes 168 font attributes 155 form attributes 160 print job 61 server attributes 198 supervisor attributes 204 user privileges 135 N native language selection 236 network determine structure 97 104 oO objects display 55 permission lists 12 75
176. ile2 de SP211 pc HP LASERJET To configure printer printer2 as the default destination XP_DESTIN printer2 export XP_DESTIN 20 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options To print filel on printer printer2 xpadd dr filel To configure printers printerl and printer2 as the default destination XP_DESTIN printerl printer2 export XP_DESTIN To print the file fi lel on one of the printers printer1 or printera2 xpadd dr filel 3 4 Using Xprint V7 0 options This section describes further options for printing files with Xprint V7 0 The individual subsections describe the various possibilities offered by Xprint V7 0 for printing documents 3 4 1 Printing parts of a document e In raw mode printing parts of documents is not supported 1 By default all pages of a document are printed when xpadd is used If you want to print only specific parts of the file use one of the following options to select the sections to be printed pS page_select You can select individual pages or ranges of pages for printing by using one of the following methods You can specify individual page numbers separated by commas e g 1 6 7 16 pages 1 6 7 and 16 are printed You can specify a range of pages a b where b must always be larger than a 18 34 pages 18 through 34 are printed 3 all pages from page 3 onward are printed U23841 J Z915 6 76 21 Using Xpr
177. ing The entire list of criteria must be enclosed in quotes By means of the selection_criteria_list you can select for example all the jobs that are to be printed on a specific date you can display all the users who have already printed more than 1000 pages you can assign a new security level to all the users with a specific security level Inthe selection_criteria_list you can specify several criteria simultaneously These must be separated by blanks Inthe selection_criteria_list you can specify almost all the options you can use with the xpadd command see also Xprint V7 0 V5 2A Reference Manual There are however certain restrictions and also additional features These are described further below in the section Special cases Specifying the wildcards any number of characters and exactly one character is allowed for arguments of non numeric options For options without arguments Boolean options you can find out whether the relevant option was specified or not by following it with a or character Inthe case of options that allow you to specify several combined values the selected objects are those which have at least the specified values set To search exclusively for the objects for which exactly the specified values are set follow the option with the character 266 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Appendix Selection criteria lists Example The following command deletes all the
178. ing all those printers which are to be denied access to the form A list of all permission lists can be displayed with the following commana xpshow prm If there is no suitable list defined in the Xprint V7 0 system you can create one yourself see section Creating a permission list on page 144 e Assign the selected permission list to the desired form xpmod frm selection up list_name where selection is the name of one or more forms If it is not specified all forms are modified Otherwise you can either specify a list of the forms to which you want to assign a permission list or you can define a selection criteria list according to which the relevant forms are selected list_name is the name of the selected permission list 150 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering permission lists 6 7 8 Allowing or prohibiting administration of supervisors In your capacity as the Xprint V7 0 administrator Xprint V7 0 permits you to specify which local administrators root or subroot are allowed to attach super visors to a server that is running on a different host For example you can allow root of host B to attach a supervisor of B to a server running on host A This can be achieved by assigning a permission list to the relevant server Here is how to do this e Log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator e Deactivate the server for which you want to change the associated super visors xpchange srv
179. ing to do with the actual print job If necessary configure the path With the ca option administrator s comment you must specify the name of the BSD printer in the form queue remote_printer and the name of the host to which the BSD printer is connected host host_name e Ifthe name of the remote printer remote_printer is the same as that l of the local pseudo printer bsd_printer queue remote_printer need not be specified You must separate these specifications with a blank If the LPD service at the BSD system is defined at a different port than usual this port number can also be defined here by additionally specifying an entry port port_number If required specify for pcl a PCL defined in the system which corresponds to the BSD printer If the required PCL does not yet exist you can define it as described in the section Adding a PCL on page 180 Example You want to configure a new BSD PostScript printer BSD_PS at host host3 The fast filter bsd however is not yet configured in the system and the printer is to be activated automatically each time Xprint V7 0 is started xpadd flt bsd tp FAST cm bsd op LOGIN PRINTER DOC REF COMMENT TITLE U23841 J Z915 6 76 211 Accessing BSD printers Interoperability xpadd dev BSD_PS da var tmp PS1 f1 bsd ca queue PS1 host host3 pc POSTSCRIPT aa Troubleshooting If your print jobs are rejected by
180. inistrator can terminate Xprint V7 0 on his her local host Furthermore the Xprint V7 0 administrator can shut down Xprint V7 0 on any host in the system If Xprint V7 0 is terminated on a local host the following objects are also deacti vated all its servers all its local supervisors even if controlled by the remote system all its local printers all remote printers and supervisors which are controlled by the local server Active print jobs controlled by a server whose host is shut down are inter rupted For more information see the command xpchange dev wn NOW ule e Deactivate the system with the following command xpstop ho host The host option can only be used by the Xprint V7 0 administrator as only he she is allowed to terminate Xprint V7 0 on remote systems Reinitializing the Xprint V7 0 database You might need to reinitialize the Xprint V7 0 database for example if it could not be initialized when Xprint V7 0 was installed or if the system breaks down e Call DBinstall var spool Xprint config bin DBinstall e Enter NO when asked if this is a new installation 86 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Administrative tasks under Xprint e Now specify the name of a host on which Xprint V7 0 is running Selecting the language For the language interface Xprint V7 0 uses the value of the NLS environment variable LANG The following languag
181. int V7 0 Administering servers Note that Xprint V7 0 creates a default server when you define a new supervisor without specifying an associated server xpadd spv se Similarly a default server is created when you add a new printer without specifying a supervisor xpadd dev su This default server is then assigned the name of the super visor or printer It is only created if it does not yet exist in the system Copying and modifying a server Using the xpcopy srv command you can copy existing servers in the system quite easily This is useful if the new server is to have similar attributes to an existing server With the xpcopy srv command you define a new server on the host on which you issue the command unless you specify another host with the ho option e Copy the relevant server xpcopy srv name_old_server name_new_server modifications ho host_name For name_old_server specify the name of the server you want to copy For name_new_server specify the name of the new server If the name already exists the command is rejected host_name represents the name of the remote host on which the server is to be added Only the Xprint V7 0 administrator can add a server on a remote host For modifications specify the modifications you want to make For more detailed information on possible modifications refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual With the options sp scheduling and up user_privileges you can defi
182. int V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 23 pages up to page 23 are printed You can specify combinations of page ranges 15 17 all pages are printed except for page 16 15 27 30 35 all pages up to page 15 from page 27 through page 30 and from page 35 onward are printed 15 30 35 all pages up to page 15 page 30 and all pages from page 35 onward are printed Finally you can combine individual pages and page ranges e The two hyphens are indispensable and must always be specified if l you want to print up to a certain page without specifying a start page They prevent the minus sign from being interpreted as the beginning of a new option If you do not specify any page numbers after the ps option all pages of the document are printed exactly as if the ps option had not been specified fr string A string in your document where printing is to start If Xprint V7 0 does not find the specified string nothing is printed to string A string in your document where printing is to stop If Xprint V7 0 does not find the specified string in your document the document is printed up to the end If the ps option is combined with the fr and or to option Xprint V7 0 searches the specified strings in the page ranges defined with ps e If the print job is sent to a device that does not use a PCL i e prints in l raw mode see section Using further options on page 37 the optio
183. int on printers of the local Xprint V7 0 domain via the local gateway deactivate the local gateway xpchange gtw gateway st NOT_ACTIVE You only need to deactivate the local gateway if you want to modify the list of allowed gateways This is not necessary if you have defined the local gateway with ag ALL or if the you do not want to make the new gateway an allowed gateway define it only for sending requests e g xpmod gtw gateway ag partner_gateway Then reactivate the local gateway with the following commana xpchange gtw gateway Example To set up an additional connection from the local gateway nashua to the 1 pd spooler of the BSD UNIX system picasso X 0 x Xx pshow gtw scl tp LOCAL np TCP pp BSD nly returns the gateway GTW_nashua padd gtw GTW_picasso tp PARTNER ho picasso ga 515 b1 GTW_nashua np TCP pp BSD pch pmod gtw Gl pch ange gtw Gl ange gtw Gl TWonash TWonash ua st NOT_ACTIVE W_nashua ag GTW_picasso ua 228 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Administering gateways 7 4 2 Deleting a gateway connection A gateway connection that is no longer needed for example because the remote partner computer no longer exists can be deleted If you only want to stop the use of a gateway connection temporarily you can deactivate it completely or only in one direction see section Deactivating a gateway on page 23
184. ion rp retention_period This defines how long the print job is to be retained in the system after its completion The default is 0 remove immedi ately e If you specify the keyword INFINITE the print job remains in the system l permanently Printing a document directly To send a document directly to the printer by bypassing the print queue you can use the option dp stands for direct printing This option allows quick printing of a document you cannot however modify the print job xpmod or xpchange or request information on the job xpshow You can only select one printer which must be disabled for normal Xprint V7 0 spoolout by the Xprint V7 0 adminis trator You are only assigned a local rather than a global ID for the print job you submit This local ID can be used to delete the job xpde1 or display its status xpstat Initial state of a print job When a print job is transferred to the spooler it is automatically assigned the status WAIT waiting for printout You can however also assign it the status SUSPEND to defer it or TOP to move it to the top of the print queue with the st option if your Xprint V7 0 administrator has given you the required permission U23841 J Z915 6 76 37 Using Xprint V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 The wa option wait activation allows you to assign the status SCHEDULED to the print job This means that the print job is added to the print
185. ivating or deactivating supervisors on page 203 modify the attributes of a supervisor section Modifying the attributes of a supervisor on page 204 Table 26 Administering supervisors 6 16 1 Adding a supervisor There are two possible ways of adding a supervisor you can either define a new supervisor from scratch or you can copy an existing one and if required modify its attributes Note If you add a new supervisor to the Xprint V7 0 system the supervisor status is automatically set to NOT_ACTIVE When the supervisor is activated for the first time see section Activating or deactivating super visors on page 203 a subdirectory with the name of the supervisor is created in the var spool Xprint config SP directory unless this has already been done Defining a new supervisor e Add anew supervisor to the system xpadd spv supervisor_name se server_name ho host_name supervisor_name is the unique name of the new supervisor If there is already a supervisor with this name the command is rejected For server_name specify the name of the server on which the supervisor is to be added A server name must be specified otherwise the default name is used host_name represents the name of the remote host on which the supervisor 200 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering supervisors is to be added Only the Xprint V7 0 administrator root and subroot can add a supervisor on a remote ho
186. jects which are no longer used by any other Xprint V7 0 object can be deleted Before deleting an object you should therefore make sure that there are no references to the specified object Any references can be displayed using the xpshow command with the option di REFERENCED_BY see section Displaying the attributes of an Xprint V7 0 object on page 83 Any objects with references to the object to be deleted must be modified such that theses references are canceled Printers dev gateways gtw servers srv and supervisors spv must be deactivated before they can be deleted If necessary this can be checked with the xpstat command see section Displaying the status of an Xprint V7 0 object on page 82 If an object to be deleted is still active it must be deactivated with the xpchange command used with the option st NOT_ACTIVE see section Changing the status of Xprint V7 0 objects on page 82 When deleting an object of the type server you must always make sure that the print queue assigned to the server does not contain any print jobs as these will be lost when the server is deleted For servers you are therefore advised to deactivate spoolin some time before deleting the server In this case any print jobs in the print queue can still be printed without any more jobs being added Another possibility is to redirect the print queues of a printer assigned to the server to another printer 80 U23841
187. job templates to select one which best meets your requirements xpshow jtp selection di LONG For selection you can either specify a list of the job templates whose attributes you want to display or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant job templates are selected If you do not specify selection a list of all job templates is displayed U23841 J Z915 6 76 177 Administering global job templates Configuring Xprint V7 0 You must use the di LONG option to display all the attributes of a job template Select a suitable job template xpmod jtp selection modifications For modifications you can use all the options that may be used when defining a new job template with the xpadd jtp command For more detailed infor mation refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Examples To modify the job template letter1 such that in future the printout will be in Helvetica instead of in Times xpmod jtp letterl tp Helvetica 178 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering PCLs 6 13 Administering PCLs A printer capability list PCL contains all the information Xprint V7 0 requires to print a document on a printer By means of the PCL Xprint V7 0 converts the options of the xpadd job command into control characters that the p
188. ke sure that the server is no longer connected to a supervisor and that it is not processing any print jobs xpshow srv server_name diR For server_name you specify the name of exactly one server you want to delete If you want to delete several servers you must repeat this command for each one For selection you can either specify a list of form names or you can define a list of selection criteria with the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix according to which the forms to be deleted are selected e lf references to the server are displayed you must remove these by modifying the displayed objects accordingly 196 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering servers e Deactivate the server xpchange srv Lselection st NOT_ACTIVE For selection you can either specify a list of servers you want to deactivate or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant servers are selected If you do not specify selection all servers are deactivated e Delete the server xpdel srv selection You can also delete several servers at once via the selection criteria lists mentioned above In this case however you must make sure that each of the servers is inactive not connected to a supervi
189. l job id Example A job with the permanent job id host 1 0000003049 5 has been added on host1 and the following command is submitted from host2 xpshow host1 0000003049 5 L jid Global jid Originator Destination Form fc pr XP000093 lt host1 0000003049 5 gt not accessible Selection criteria lists You can also access submitted print jobs via what are called selection criteria lists In this case you can select print jobs via specific criteria such as the printer to which the job was sent its priority the scheduled print time etc Selection criteria may be specified for all commands with which you can display modify or delete print jobs Use the following option SC selection_criteria_list This option allows you to select print jobs according to criteria which must be enclosed in double quotes The selection criteria are all the options which were specified when the print job was defined except for jt job_title te job_template and sx silent execution In the case of options without arguments Boolean options you can select the relevant option by means of a following set or not set sign In the case of options which allow for the use of several combined values normally those jobs are selected for which at least the specified values are set For an exclusive search for print jobs with exactly the specified values the option must be followed by the sign The wildcards and are allowed f
190. l not to be available on your local host colorado but on the remote host nile xpcopy flt slowmail fastmail ho nile 166 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering filters 6 10 2 Deleting filters With the xpdel f1t command you can delete from the Xprint V7 0 system any filter that you administer A filter referenced by another object e g a fast filter assigned to an existing printer cannot be deleted Check whether the filter to be deleted is still referenced by other objects xpshow flt selection filter_name diR For filter_name you specify the name of exactly one filter you want to delete If you want to want to delete several filters you must repeat this command for each one For selection you can either specify a list of form names or you can define a list of selection criteria with the sc1 selection_criteria_list option See section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix according to which the forms to be deleted are selected If references to the filter are displayed you must remove these by modifying the displayed objects accordingly Enter the following command xpdel flt selection For selection you can either specify a list of the filters to be deleted or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the filters to be deleted
191. l status which is defined via the st option In addition to this spoolin and spoolout can be switched on and off individually with the options si and so If the xpchange command is invoked for an object without options it always switches on all states ACTIVE or ON Similarly all the states of the object are switched off when the object is deactivated with the st NOT_ACTIVE option When a substate which has been switched off is switched back on Xprint V7 0 automatically makes sure that the main status is set to ACTIVE 5 3 5 Displaying information on Xprint V7 0 objects With the xpstat and xpshow commands you can display information on each Xprint V7 0 object you are allowed to use or administer For a detailed description of using these commands for each object type see the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Displaying the status of an Xprint V7 0 object e To display the status of an Xprint V7 0 object use the following commana xpstat object_type selection di display For object_type you specify the object whose status you want to display e g dev for printer If the object type is not specified the command refers by default to print jobs Jjob If selection is not specified the command refers to all objects of the specified type in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the objects whose status you want to display or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list optio
192. l the attributes displayed by the xpshow and xpstat commands for the corresponding objects The description of each attribute can be found in the comments of the MIB file The MIB file Xprint V7 0 MIB txt is installed in the SNMP subdirectory of the Xprint V7 0 installation directory For all supported object types except jobs the complete domain configuration is accessible In the specific case of jobs only jobs managed by local servers to the agent host are visible The purpose of this agent is the monitoring of Xprint V7 0 activity but not the administration Therefore only read access is allowed via SNMP agent Moreover no SNMP trap functionality is supported Be aware that objects from another domain for instance the partner gateway are always shown as not active The purpose of the SNMP agent is to monitor objects from the domain not the objects from another one For efficiency the Xprint V7 0 information is first completely stored in a Cache area responsible for collecting the complete definition and state of each supported object This cache is notified about configuration updates except for hosts becoming unreachable due to system or network crash or devices in error but located on another host than the agent system The latter situations are anyway detected via a polling mechanism The SNMP agent has also a copy of this information in order to boost access This copy is automatically resynchronised with the Cache c
193. l the assignment of the recovery rule with the following command xpmod dev selection rr This command revokes the current assignment of a recovery rule to the specified printer s Now you can reactivate the printer xpchange dev selection 6 14 4 Modifying recovery rules If you want to modify recovery rules you must modify their source file usually located in the Xprint V7 0 directory RR and then recompile it Proceed as follows Modify the source file of the relevant recovery rule using an ASCII editor To do this use the procedure described in the section Defining a recovery rule on page 186 Recompile the recovery rules using the following command xpmod rec rule_name fi rule_file ca comment where rule_name is the name of the modified recovery rules in the Xprint V7 0 system and rule_file specifies the file name of the modified source file If this file is not located in the Xprint V7 0 directory RR you must specify the absolute path name With comment you can specify or modify a comment i If the xpmod command is called on a host other than the one on which the rule file was added with xpadd Xprint V7 0 uses the original host and path to access the file You can make Xprint V7 0 modify the local copy of the selected file by using the ho option U23841 J Z915 6 76 191 Administering recovery rules Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 14 5 Deleting a recovery rule To delete a r
194. le polling RESET FOMANDAOBRWNME Please type a number to update an attribute press return to start modification processing q to quit or for help 5 To modify the displayed configuration you must select the corresponding number and confirm with Enter Then the corresponding entry is marked e g gt gt 5 Connection type SERIAL e Confirm again with Enter Then the possible parameters for the relevant option are displayed from which you can select one by marking the number and confirming with Enter e g Updating attribute Connection type Current value SERIAL Possible values are 1 SERIAL 2 PARALLEL 3 LAN 4 SCSI Type entry number any other entry means no change 2 e Once you have made all the settings according to your requirements confirm with Enter Xprint V7 0 then confirms the entry of the new printer with the following message Updating device model HPLJ 4P U23841 J Z915 6 76 111 Predefined printers Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 3 2 Extending the list of predefined printers If you need to configure a non predefined printer type frequently in Xprint V7 0 you can enter this printer type in the var spool Xprint config data conf_dev file with the corresponding default values This allows you to configure printers of this type with the xpconf_dev command By default you require system administrator privileges to be able to edit this file The file consists
195. lete it from the Xprint V7 0 system To do this proceed as follows Log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator Check first whether the permission list you wish to delete is referenced by other Xprint V7 0 objects xpshow usr selectionlpermission_list di R With permission_list you specify exactly one permission list to be deleted If you want to delete several permission lists you must repeat this command for each of these lists If you do not specify a selection the command refers to all permission lists in the system otherwise you can either specify a list of the permission lists to be removed or you can define a list of selection criteria with the sc selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix according to which the permission lists to be removed are selected If references to the permission list are displayed you must remove these by modifying the displayed objects accordingly Remove the list from the Xprint V7 0 system with the following command xpdel prm selection If selection is not specified the command refers to all the permission lists in the local Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the permission lists you want to delete or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant
196. lity configurations possibly changing the host name in the Xprint V7 0 configuration in the event that a reserve host is to assume the functions of the failed main host Configuring an Xprint V7 0 administrator You should define an Xprint V7 0 administrator for managing Xprint V7 0 on your system Except for starting the spooler system with the xpstart command which requires root privileges the Xprint V7 0 administrator can perform all the administrative tasks concerning Xprint V7 0 on your system The rest of this chapter assumes the existence of an Xprint V7 0 administrator If you have not defined an Xprint V7 0 administrator the specified actions must be performed by root instead You can assign this task to any existing user on your system or you can first set up a separate user ID U23841 J Z915 6 76 101 Administering hosts users only Configuring Xprint V7 0 e Log into your system as root e f required set up a separate user ID for the Xprint V7 0 administrator e Define the Xprint V7 0 administrator him herself with the following commands xpadd usr xprintadm xpmod sys ad xprintadm where xprintadm ad stands for administrator represents the user ID of the user who is to be the Xprint V7 0 administrator Renaming the host computer In high availability configurations several hosts usually work with shared disk resources so that should one of the two hosts fail the other host can continue doing
197. llel and dev io0 sprin022 for SCSI ports If the printer to be configured is a LAN printer with its own network adapter card which is connected via a terminal server or via a PC to the software Wprint or SPPCS the address consists of an Internet address or the corresponding host name from the file etc hosts and a port number In this case the format of the printer address is for example 139 23 124 37 7001 For details on the Internet address and the port number refer to the documentation and current configuration data of the LAN printer the terminal server or the software Wprint SPPCS depending on how the LAN printer is connected to the network Enter the address and confirm with Enter e Now you are asked to assign a name to the new printer Please give a device name Type device name q to quit or for help Enter a name which is not yet used in the system and press Enter 110 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Predefined printers When you have performed these steps Xprint V7 0 suggests a default configu ration and at the same time offers you the option of modifying this configuration e A display similar to the following appears on the screen Proposal of device definition type HP Laserjet 4P emulation HP LASERJET NAME HPLJ 4P Host colorado pcl HP LASERJET Address dev 1p0 Connection type SERIAL Protocol XON Speed 9600 Parity NONE Significant bits 8 0 Enab
198. longs to this group Xprint V7 0 has a load balancing procedure which ensures the jobs will be distributed effectively between the printers in the group You can display a list of the available printers via the xpshow dev command The available printer groups can be displayed with the xpshow dgr command pc pcl Instead of selecting a specific printer by its name you can also use the printer capability list pcl as a criterion e g POSTSCRIPT HP LASERJET or HP DESKJET In this case Xprint V7 0 sends your job to any available printer which uses the selected PCL Addressing a printer via a gateway You can also select a printer group which is not defined in your Xprint V7 0 domain provided it can be reached via a gateway This applies to printers printer groups which are available in other Xprint V7 0 domains or which are connected to computers running the DPRINT printer spooler for BS2000 systems or the BSD printer spooler for BSD UNIX systems and other systems with an Ipd print server U23841 J Z915 6 76 19 Selecting a printer Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 To address a printer group via a gateway you must specify both the name of the gateway and the name of the desired destination separating the names with the character Only the administrator can find out the name of all the gateways available using the xpshow gtw command To address a printer via a gateway specify the combination gateway printer as
199. ly be specified individually to be combined in groups These can then be specified via the job template Job templates can be defined modified or deleted for the whole system by the Xprint V7 0 administrator or user specifically by each individual user e Loadable resources 1rs Loadable resources allow faster printing of jobs that use the same background logo soft font etc They also improve job recovery A Loadable resource must be downloaded to the printer before it can be called by a print job Public loadable resources can be created modified or deleted for the whole system by the Xprint V7 0 administrator Individual users can create modify or delete private loadable resources that is loadable resources that are for their use only e PCLs pcl PCLs printer capability lists are used to define what printing options a printer provides Furthermore the PCL contains information on how the options specified when the job is submitted can be converted to printer commands Xprint V7 0 is supplied with a number of PCLs for the most 74 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Xprint V7 0 architecture common printers and with one generic PCL which in most cases also allows printing on unknown printers A list of the PCLs supported by Xprint V7 0 is provided in the Reference Manual As an administrator you can define modify and delete PCLs e Permission lists prm With permission lists you c
200. m Windows 2000 Object This is a generic term for the individual components with which you work under Xprint V7 0 e g printers printer groups print jobs forms Option These are special instructions used to govern command execution All options are preceded by a minus sign With most of the Xprint V7 0 commands you can specify several options also simultaneously The command line xpadd dr text de printer fm form1 for example contains the options dr de and fm which are used to alter the function of the xpadd command Parasite host A parasite host is a host which does not have a copy of the Xprint V7 0 database It requires Xprint V7 0 to be running on a specific computer which is assigned to it as the database server if Xprint V7 0 is to be accessed from the parasite host PCL printer capability list This is an object containing all the information Xprint V7 0 needs for controlling a printer It describes how print options are to be converted into the corresponding control characters the printer needs Furthermore it contains information on the technical features of the printer e g its connection protocol and the conversion of common control characters form feed line feed etc performed by the printer It also describes how the dialog is to be conducted with the printer U23841 J Z915 6 76 275 Glossary Permission list Permission lists are Xprint V7 0 objects in which access rights for
201. mand cpio icvBd Install lt lt device gt Where device represents the path of the device from which you install the software i e the pathname of the special file of the magnetic tape drive or of the CD ROM drive e Enter the following command tmp Install pwd Then the Xprint V7 0 directory is created in which the entire software is going to be installed Xprint V7 0 can also be installed in another directory In this case you should create a link between the actual Xprint V7 0 directory and the var spool Xprint directory aul o In the case of installations with cpio DBinstal1 must be called manually and there is no automatic configuration of printers 8 4 2 Installing with pkgadd The pkgadd command provides another way of installing Xprint V7 0 In the case of this command the installation procedure is menu driven you only need to follow the instructions or select one of the options offered by the program Start the installation with the following commana pkgadd d lt device_name gt Xprint V7 0 pkg device_name represents the identifier of the device from which you install the software i e the identifier of the magnetic tape drive or of the CD ROM drive 238 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Installing Xprint V7 0 Installation new 8 4 3 Installing with sd method After inserting the media in the correct device enter the following command and just follow the guided dialogue swinstal In cas
202. me If selection is not specified the command refers to all the printer groups in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer groups to be removed or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant printer groups are selected Example To delete the printer printer3 from the printer group group1 retaining all the other printers xpmod dgr groupl dl printer3 U23841 J Z915 6 76 129 Administering printer groups Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 5 4 Deactivating a printer group To deactivate a printer group use the xpchange dgr command You can only change the current spoolin status of the printer groups you manage e Use the following command to deactivate a printer group xpchange dgr selection si OFF ju justification If selection is not specified the command refers to all the printer groups in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer groups to be deactivated or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the printer groups to be deactivated are selected The option si OFF specifies the new spoolin status in this case OFF for the selected printer group When si OFF is se
203. ments 2 4 2 Options for printing documents In a network as well as on a stand alone system Xprint V7 0 provides extensive functionality for printing documents see also the Reference Manual Selecting the output device of your choice You can print your documents on any device in the Xprint V7 0 system which you are allowed to use You can choose either an individual device or a device group as the destination You can also define your personal default device to which every print job is sent for which you do not explicitly specify a destination and you can access devices which are not available in your own Xprint V7 0 domain via what are called gateways Automatic adjustment of the document type Xprint V7 0 allows you to send any document to any device If the relevant filters are defined the document type is automatically adjusted to the device type This makes it possible for example to print normal ASCII files on PostScript printers the filter for this conversion is supplied with Xprint V7 0 Printing several copies of a document For every print job you can specify how many copies of the entire job are to be printed Provided the printer supports this option you can also print several copies of each individual page In this case each page is printed several times before the next page is printed Printing parts of a document You can also print parts of a document Here it is possible to define the part to be printed by
204. ministrators This manual contains information for the system administrator on how to install and configure Xprint V7 0 locally on his her system e Xprint V7 0 administrators If you are responsible for administering Xprint V7 0 in a network this manual informs you of the options you have for doing this and how to make the best use of these to achieve your goals U23841 J Z915 6 76 1 Structure of the manual Preface 1 2 Structure of the manual The individual chapters of this manual deal with various aspects of using and configuring Xprint V7 0 on UNIX systems All the special features of Xprint V7 0 on the Windows platforms are presented in a separate chapter You should read the following chapters depending on which tasks you have to perform Chapter 2 Introduction to Xprint V7 0 starting on page 5 This chapter describes Xprint V7 0 from the points of view of the user and the administrator You should in any case read the sections relevant to you These will tell you about the possibilities you have for printing under Xprint V7 0 and what steps you might have to take when configuring Xprint V7 0 Chapter 3 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 starting on page 15 This chapter describes how to print documents using the Xprint V7 0 commands Chapter 4 Managing print jobs starting on page 49 This chapter describes how to manage existing print jobs using the Xprint V7 0 commands Chapter 5 Intr
205. mmers of Xprint V7 0 Contents Description of Xprint V7 0 Mercator User Interface for operation admin istration and maintenance U23841 J Z915 6 76 279 Related publications 4 Wprint V3 1 User Guide Target group Windows administrators and Wprint NT users Contents Description of the installation configuration and operation of Wprint V3 1 the Xprint V7 0 client for Windows NT Please apply to your local office for ordering the manuals 280 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Index A access rights permission lists for forms 12 75 permission lists for users 12 75 specify allowed list 75 specify denied list 75 activate gateway 232 printer 118 120 printer group 131 server 194 197 supervisor 201 203 add filter 162 font 152 form 157 PCL 180 printer 103 116 printer to printer group 129 server 193 supervisor 200 administration 85 administrator setup 98 100 104 107 213 application program specifying the printcommand 37 auditing 85 Axis 270 B BC XOM 8 Cc change printer port 122 server status 197 supervisor status 203 character pitch 72 character set 72 command xpadd 79 xpchange 82 xpdel 80 xpmod 81 configure gateway 213 host 105 LAN 235 new host 98 105 on stand alone system 101 printer 117 copies of individual pages 35 D data format 61 database 97 99 103 106 DBinstall 86 deactivate gateway 230 printer 118 printer group 130 server 197 supervisor 203 default destination
206. ms and assign these to printers A user can only assign these objects to his her print jobs thus overriding the default settings Selecting a font or form does not mean however that all the options defined by this object must be accepted exactly as they are Every user can assign to a job a predefined form and additionally specify single options which will override the settings defined by the form Fonts and forms are selected with the following options ft font_name If you want to use a predefined font for printing your document select the font font_name with the ft option You must however make sure that the printer to which your print job is sent supports the selected font You can display a list of the defined fonts with the xpshow fnt command fm form_name form_name is the name of a predefined form on which you want to print your document You can display a list of all the available forms with the xpshow frm command There are two types of form AUTOMATIC and MANUAL This differentiation is due to the fact that there are forms which require manual intervention at the printer e g changing paper or font cassettes and others which do not 40 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using other Xprint V7 0 objects pi o Jobs using forms of the type MANUAL which require manual intervention at the printer are only printed when Xprint V7 0 is informed that the required steps for printing t
207. n page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant users are selected The type of information displayed can be selected with the di display option Possible values for display include LONG and SHORT default Example To display the current print quotas for smith xpstat usr smith di LONG NAME smith Allowed pages 1500 Consumed pages 112 Allowed jobs 70 Consumed jobs 8 6 6 8 Assigning a security level to a user By assigning a specific security level to a user can only be done by the Xprint V7 0 administrator you allow the user to use all the printers with this security level or lower To change a user s security level proceed as follows e Log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator e Modify the security level xpmod usr selection s1 security_level If selection is not specified the command refers to all the users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the user s whose security level you want to modify or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant users are selected For security_level specify one of the following in ascending order UNCLASSIFIED default SENSITIVE CONFIDENTIAL SECRET TOP_SECRET U23841 J Z915 6 76 141 Administering users Configuring Xprint V7 0 Examples
208. n see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant supervisors are selected If selection is not specified the status of all supervisors is changed status is the status the supervisor is to have This variable can assume the values ACTIVE or NOT_ACTIVE Examples To activate the supervisor marcus xpchange spv marcus To deactivate all supervisors with the comment please_delete xpchange spv scl ca please_delete st NOT_ACTIVE U23841 J Z915 6 76 203 Administering supervisors Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 16 3 Modifying the attributes of a supervisor You can modify the attributes of any supervisor you administer You cannot modify the attributes of an active supervisor You must first set it to the status NOT_ACTIVE To modify the attributes of a supervisor proceed as follows Deactivate the relevant supervisor s xpchange spv selection st NOT_ACTIVE For selection you can either specify a list of the supervisors you want to deactivate or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant supervisors are selected If selection is not specified the status of all supervisors is changed Modify the relevant attributes xpmod spv selection modifications For modifications
209. n see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant objects are selected 82 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Administrative tasks under Xprint With the option di display you can determine the scope of the display as described for print jobs in the section Displaying print jobs on page 55 Displaying the attributes of an Xprint V7 0 object e Toobtain more detailed information on the definition of an Xprint V7 0 object use the following command xpshow object_type selection di display For object_type you specify the object whose attributes you want to display e g dev for printer If the object type is not specified the command refers by default to print jobs job If selection is not specified the command refers to all the objects of the specified type in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the objects whose attributes you want to display or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant objects are selected To display information on printers or printer groups which can only be reached via gateways you must specify the name of the printer or printer group in the format gateway printer_name Which details of the printer o
210. n additional connection from an Once you have configured a connection from a local gateway to a remote partner gateway you can configure additional connections to other partner gateways from the local gateway provided those partner gateways use the same network protocol TCP or ISO ISO is only available for users Furthermore optimum functionality is only ensured if the print protocol is the same GIP2 or BSD It is possible for example to configure another connection to another BSD UNIX system from a local gateway for which a connection to a remote BSD UNIX system already exists e Also for configuring additional connections of a local gateway to other l partner gateways you must be logged in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator Only this administrator has the required privileges U23841 J Z915 6 76 227 Administering gateways Interoperability To configure additional connections to other gateways proceed as follows First check whether there is a local gateway to which you can add the new connection xpshow gtw scl tp LOCAL np protocol pp gateway_type This command returns a list of all the local gateways of the type gateway_type using the network protocol protocol Then define the new partner gateway with the xpadd gtw command as described earlier in this section for the individual gateway types see section Gateways on page 213 If you want to allow the partner gateway to pr
211. n the supporting hosts as Xprint V7 0 cannot run on the parasite if it hasn t been started on the supporting host U23841 J Z915 6 76 105 Administering hosts users only Configuring Xprint V7 0 If you divide the original domain into several smaller domains printers that are now in a different domain can be accessed by prefixing their names with a gateway name If the devices must be accessed with the same name from every host independently of which host they belong to then this can be achieved by replicating the definition of the network devices in each domain A physical printer can then be defined with the same logical name in each network A user can then access the printer by using this name from any host in the system Procedure Once at least the primary master host is defined you can add all the other systems to Xprint V7 0 The order in which you configure them also determines the order of the host hierarchy If one computer is entered after another computer it also ranks below this one in the hierarchy see section Xprint V7 0 objects on page 9 To add a new host to the Xprint V7 0 configuration you must perform steps on both the active host and the host to be added First the new host must be regis tered in the existing Xprint V7 0 configuration then it can import the Xprint V7 0 database and become part of the Xprint V7 0 network To configure a new host proceed as follows e Log in to an active host
212. n the template templatel setting the destination to printer1 and the form to letter2 xpcopy jtp templatel letterl de printerl fm letter2 To add the job template generic with the settings destination printerl and data content type SIMPLE on the remote host nile xpadd jtp generic de printerl ct SIMPLE ah nile 176 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering global job templates 6 12 2 Deleting a job template With the xpdel jtp command you can delete any job template you admin ister To delete a template proceed as follows e Delete the job template with the following command xpdel jtp selection For selection you can either specify a list of the job templates you want to delete or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant job templates are selected If you do not specify selection all templates are deleted Example To delete the job templates letter1 letter2 and invoice xpdel jtp letterl letter2 invoice To delete all job templates assigned to printer printer4 and having the priority 50 xpdel jtp scl de printer4 pr 50 6 12 3 Customizing job templates With the xpmod jtp command you can modify the attributes of any job template you administer To modify a job template proceed as follows e Display the existing
213. nd Examples To activate printer printer1 with the justification that it is now ready again xpchange dev printerl ju ready again To activate spoolin for all printers connected to host colorado xpchange dev scl ho colorado si ON To activate all printers xpchange dev 120 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering devices 6 4 4 Removing a printer To remove a defined printer because it is no longer available on your system use the following procedure e Loginas root or if defined as the Xprint V7 0 administrator Check first whether the printer you wish to delete is referenced by other Xprint V7 0 objects If so these references must be removed Use the following command to check for references xpshow dev selection printer_name diR With printer_name you specify exactly one printer to be deleted If you want to delete several printers you must repeat this command for each of these printers If you do not specify a selection the command refers to all printers in the system otherwise you can either specify a list of the printers to be removed or you can define a list of selection criteria with the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix according to which the printers to be removed are selected e lf references to the printer are displayed you must remove these before you can delete the printer
214. ne which scheduling policy applies and which users can assign supervisors to the server see section Administering permission lists on page 143 See the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual for more detailed information Examples You want to copy the server hudson and name the new server nashua nashua being controlled by host nile Furthermore you want the new server nashua to process the smallest job first instead of the biggest job as is defined for server hudson xpcopy srv hudson nashua ho nile sp SMALL xpchange srv nashua st ACTIVE U23841 J Z915 6 76 195 Administering servers Configuring Xprint V7 0 To add anew server nashua on the remote host colorado xpadd srv nashua ho colorado xpchange srv nashua st ACTIVE To add the new server delaware based on server nashua on the remote host nile and to specify that the new server delaware is to process the biggest print jobs first xpcopy srv nashua delaware ho nile sp BIG xpchange srv delaware st ACTIVE 6 15 2 Deleting a server With the command xpdel srv you can delete any server you administer When you delete a server its directory var spool Xprint config SV server_name is also deleted If the server has the status ACTIVE or is connected to an existing supervisor it cannot be deleted Note If you delete a server any jobs on it which might still be pending are also deleted To delete a server proceed as follows e Ma
215. network printer is of importance you can define several logical printers on different hosts in the Xprint V7 0 system which all have the same address The advantage of this is that the printer is already available when just one of the hosts is in operation U23841 J Z915 6 76 91 Rules for configuring the system Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 5 4 4 Configuring gateways Gateways provide interoperability between different Xprint V7 0 domains and between Xprint V7 0 and other spooler systems There are two types of gateway The BSD gateways These allow Xprint V7 0 users to access BSD LPD printer servers e g Novell Netware with the BSD LPD emulation Flex IP and to share Xprint V7 0 resources with BSD LPD users e g a WPRINT PC user The functionality includes the basic job administration functions xpadd job xpdel job xpstat job xpshow job restricted functions concerning the print resources xpshow dev xpstat dev As only the BSD LPD functions are accessible with this type of gateway the additional Xprint V7 0 options are not available The GIP2 gateway This offers two possibilities 1 Connecting two Xprint V7 0 domains This provides the following function ality the complete functionality concerning job administration xpadd job xpmod job xpchange job xpdel job xpshow job xpstat job access to some options concerning Xprint V7 0 resources xpsho
216. new host __ section Configuring a new host on page 98 Table 8 Administering hosts 6 1 1 Configuring the first host Configuring Xprint V7 0 on a stand alone system and configuring the first host in a network only requires a few steps This is in most cases done by one person who is referred to below as the Xprint V7 0 administrator This section is only intended for the Xprint V7 0 administrator The Xprint V7 0 administrator may be someone who is only responsible for managing Xprint V7 0 or he she 96 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering hosts may be one of the system administrators of the computers involved If you as the Xprint V7 0 administrator want to introduce Xprint V7 0 into an existing network you must perform the following tasks in the order given below first study the network structure define a primary master host which first manages the Xprint V7 0 database later you can specify additional computers which are to serve as reserve masters in case the defined master fails For more information on the host hierarchy see the section Xprint V7 0 objects on page 9 configure Xprint V7 0 on the primary master host and define a user ID for the Xprint V7 0 administrator configure the other systems in the network Then you or the respective system administrators must configure the individual printers by adding them to the Xprint V7 0 configuration The
217. ng Xprint V7 0 Predefined printers Field Meaning 6 Significant bits for a connection via a serial interface the number of bits for transferring a character is specified here Possible values are 7 and 8 7 Protocol for a connection via a serial interface the handshake protocol for the connection is specified here Possible values are XON ETX and RXON 8 Polling this field specifies whether polling is enabled or not Possible values are Y yes and N no 9 Connection type this field specifies how the printer is usually connected Possible values are SERIAL PARALLEL SCSI and LAN Table 11 conf_dev file U23841 J Z915 6 76 113 Administering devices Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 4 Administering devices This section describes all the steps required for configuring and modifying printers It presents simple procedures which allow you to quickly configure standard situations without referring to the Reference Manual This section does not explain how to configure faxes and e mail outputs Please consult the Reference Manual for the particular features of such output devices Bear in mind that a number of predefined printers can also be configured with the xpconf_dev command which is described in the previous section The following table serves as a guide through this section and refers you to other sections containing additional information on printers If you want to Re
218. nistering hosts 0 96 Configuring the first host 0 96 Configuringanewhost 0 00005 98 Administering hosts users only 101 Configuring Xprint V7 0 ona stand alone system 101 Introducing Xprint V7 0 into a network 2 103 Configuring a new host in an existing Xprint V7 0 network 105 Predefined printers 22222000 108 Configuring predefined printers 109 Extending the list of predefined printers 112 Administering devices 2 04 114 Addingaprinter 2 200 116 Deactivatingaprinter 2 2 00 0 118 Reactivating aprinter 2 00 120 Removing a printer 2 00 0 121 Reconnecting a printer to another system 122 Reconnecting a printer to adifferentport 122 Replacing an existing printer withanewone 123 Assigning a security leveltoaprinter 124 Administering printer groups 126 Setting up anew printer group 127 Adding a printer to a printer group 129 Removing a printer from a printer group 129 Deactivating a printer group 130 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Contents 6 11 6 11 1 6 11 2 6 11 3 6 12 6 12 1 6 12 2 6 12 3 6 13 Reactivating a printer group 131 Deleting a printer group saoao a 1
219. nistrator Add an entry to the list with the following command xpmod prm list_name additions where list_name is the name of the permission list to be modified For additions specify al user_list if it is an allowed list dn user_list if it is a denied list where user_list represents the list of the Xprint V7 0 users or forms to be added to the permission list This list can be structured as described in the previous section Removing entries from the list To remove entries from a permission list proceed as follows Log in as the Xprint V7 0 administrator Modify the desired list with the following command xpmod prm list_name deletions where list_name is the name of the permission list to be modified For deletions specify al user_list if it is an allowed list dn user_list if it is a denied list where user_list represents the list of the Xprint V7 0 users or forms to be removed from the permission list This list can be structured as described in the previous section The elements in this list must be contained in the selected permission list 146 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering permission lists Example To add the user grant on host nashua to the list right1 xpmod prm rightl al grant nashua To add the form A5LAND to the permission list 1ist1 xpmod rm listl al A5LAND 6 7 3 Deleting a permission list If a permission list is no longer required you can de
220. nistrator means that any member of this group is recognized as Xprint V7 0 administrator On Windows it is possible to exclude a member of the Administrators group from the Xprint V7 0 administration privilege merely by creating a user with his login name in the Xprint V7 0 database So if root is set as Xprint V7 0 administrator of the domain only those members of the Administrators group who are not registered in the database will be recognized as Xprint V7 0 administrator However the members of the Administrators group who are registered in the database retain their system administrator rights in Xprint V7 0 9 3 5 Printer support Xprint V7 0 for Windows supports the following printers network printers which can be accessed at a given IP address and TCP port number Windows workgroup shared printers directly attached printers connected locally to a serial or parallel port The detection of printer errors for example end of paper and the related recovery procedure are only provided on network printers The directly attached Windows printers and workgroup shared printers can be used for printing but without any polling of the device status LAN printers The configuration is the same as with Xprint V7 0 on UNIX for example xpadd dev LANpr da 193 220 12 12 9100 coLAN pcHP LASERJET Workgroup Shared printers Xprint V7 0 for Windows can print to printers shared by a Windows station The Xprint V7 0 device m
221. not become active master host itself Slow filter This is a program enhancing the functionality of Xprint V7 0 Slow filters are executed in parallel to the spooling process i e after job submission and before printing They convert data or allow special print modes such as printing in columns or in landscape mode U23841 J Z915 6 76 277 Glossary SNMP agent The Simple Network Management Protocol abbreviated SNMP is the Internet standard protocol for exchanging management information between management console applications and managed entities SNMP uses a distributed architecture consisting of managers and agents An agent is an SNMP application that responds to queries from SNMP manager applica tions The SNMP protocol provides a set of rules to monitor and manage network resources including both hardware components and software applications In the context of Xprint V7 0 the SNMP agent exports Xprint V7 0 infor mation resources definition and status The list of exported attributes is described in a MIB file delivered in the Xprint V7 0 package Supervisor A supervisor is directly in charge of controlling one or more printers It receives the job data from the superordinate server and passes it on to the backend program Xprint V7 0 database The Xprint V7 0 database contains all the data Xprint V7 0 needs to be able to access the Xprint V7 0 resources This includes information on the defined hosts Xprint V
222. ns ps fr and to are ignored 22 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options Examples To print a document from page 5 through page 10 xpadd dr filel ps 5 10 To print a document from page 7 to the end xpadd dr filel ps 7 To print a document from page 1 through 5 xpadd dr filel ps 5 To print a document from the string Example 1 up to the string main xpadd dr filel fr Example 1 to main To select the page range from page 5 to page 19 and print the section starting with the string abc up to the string xyz in this range xpadd dr filel ps 5 19 fr abc to xyz 3 4 2 Printing files with special content types The basic print command requires that the contents of the specified files can be processed by the printer However sometimes this is not the case For example a PostScript printer cannot print ASCII files directly The simple ASCII data in the file must be converted to PostScript format before printing Xprint V7 0 can make such conversions automatically if it knows the content type of the file and what the printer expects The administrator specifies the supported content type when configuring the printer while the content type of the print data must be specified by the user when defining the print job If the two types match Xprint V7 0 can send the print job directly to the printer if th
223. nstalling Xprint V7 0 Example 2 A site license needs to be installed only once in an Xprint V7 0 domain It is propagated throughout the domain by Xprint V7 0 s internal mechanisms Host C Y Host A p Host D 256 devices A site license is available on B which offers Net Server This privilege is given to all the hosts in the domain No keys are thus needed on A C and D If keys are found locally while a site key is active Xprint V7 0 increments the site key locally with any additional privilege Host C has Net server from the site license plus the local key Net Server it already had no advantage plus R 3 kit Host D has Net Server from the site license Its second key allows up to 256 devices in the domain How to install a license key The keys to be installed consist of one or more strings made up of printable characters and spaces Each string ends with a colon in order to clearly delimit the final character The keys are saved in files whose names are prefixed with DPM standing for Distributed Printing Manager The rest of the filename is free These files are located in the directory etc OSL_LICENCE on UNIX platforms and in Xprint config data on Windows Two methods can be considered in order to install a license key manually or using the xpkey command Manual installation Make sure the directory etc OSL_LICENCE exists and give it the access mode 0555 Create A DPM lt suffix gt file wi
224. nstead the user simply assigns the print job a job template featuring the relevant options Xprint V7 0 reads these from the database and executes them Global job templates which are available throughout the entire system can only be defined by the Xprint V7 0 administrator or a local Xprint V7 0 administrator It is possible however for all users to define their own job templates on his local hosts Every user can define customized job templates and also replace global job templates by private ones If you want to Read define a job template section Defining a job template on page 174 delete a job template section Deleting a job template on page 177 customize a job template section Customizing job templates on page 177 define and use private templates section Job templates on page 44 Table 20 Administering global job templates 6 12 1 Defining a job template There are two possible ways of defining a job template you can either define a new one from scratch or you can copy an existing template and modify the relevant options Defining a completely new job template e To define a new job template use the following commana xpadd jtp template_name options where the variable template_name represents the name of the job template options stands for a list of options that may be used with the xpadd jtp command These are all the options available with the xpadd job
225. nt V7 0 domain to another Xprint V7 0 domain or to other spooler systems Via these gateways you can use the output devices and device groups of the other system involved Gateways to DPRINT spooler system for BS2000 systems or BSD spooler systems spooler systems supporting the BSD Ipr protocol allow users of the local Xprint V7 0 domain to access the output devices and device groups in these spooler systems Conversely it is also possible to access the printers and printer groups of the local Xprint V7 0 domain from DPRINT and BSD spooler systems e Exchanging data with DPRINT requires that the local gateway be l defined on a platform which has openFT installed e Hosts hos Under Xprint V7 0 the term host refers to every computer defined in an Xprint V7 0 domain Hosts are divided into different classes master slave and parasite hosts The difference lies in the way they handle the Xprint V7 0 database U23841 J Z915 6 76 9 Xprint V7 0 elements Introduction to Xprint V7 0 The Xprint V7 0 database contains all the data Xprint V7 0 needs to access Xprint V7 0 resources This includes information on the defined hosts users devices and device groups as well as on forms and all the other Xprint V7 0 objects Only the print jobs are stored on the server responsible for their execution e Servers srv Servers are the Xprint V7 0 objects which administer incoming print jobs and are responsible for sched
226. nt to yourself via the write command when the job is completed or aborted xpadd dr filel ev COMPLETED ABORTED nm WRITE To log all the events of the print job in the file nome baxter print 1og xpadd dr filel nm FILE na home baxter print log To notify user smith of every modification of the print job via mai1 xpadd dr filel ev MODIFIED na smith To send a job to a gateway and request information in the event of an error xpadd dr filel de gatewayl printerl ev REJECTED_FROM_REMOTE_DOMAIN 36 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options 3 4 9 Using further options This section describes further useful options of the xpadd command Printing in raw mode Besides printing on predefined forms Xprint V7 0 allows you to specify formatting and printer control sequences for the printer yourself This can be done with the rw option raw mode Xprint V7 0 sends the document to the selected printer without making changes to your formatting This option is particularly useful if you use the xpadd command as a print command for an application program which formats the print data itself Retention period of print jobs When the print process is finished the information which can be displayed with xpshow and xpstat is also deleted from the spooler system If you want this information to still be available you can specify a period of time in minutes with the opt
227. nts can be printed using external resources like logos soft fonts etc Calls to these resources may belong to the document or they can be inserted automatically by Xprint V7 0 at the top of the page Notification of the result Xprint V7 0 allows you to define how you want to be notified of the status of your print jobs You can define for example that in the event of an error you want user Brown to be notified by mail Direct printer control You can also control a specific printer directly and define specific printer settings such as the line spacing Defaults for print jobs Xprint V7 0 allows you to combine all the options mentioned above in what are called job templates In this way you can define frequently recurring settings once and then simply retrieve them whenever required These job templates can be defined by each user Individual national language user interface By default Xprint V7 0 uses the national language set for you for displaying messages or menus You can easily change this language by altering the setting of the environment variable LANG 14 U23841 J Z915 6 76 3 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 This chapter describes how to print documents using the command line interface To begin with it introduces the basic structure of the Xprint V7 0 commands available to the normal Xprint V7 0 user and describes how and where you can obtain additional information on the commands This is followed by
228. o stN Once the gateway is deactivated you can modify or delete it Deactivating the export of jobs from the local Xprint V7 0 domain You only want to deactivate the export of jobs from the local system to a partner system via a local gateway e To deactivate the export of jobs enter the following commana xpchange gtw gateway go OFF Deactivating the import of jobs via a local gateway If you want to temporarily deny access to the resources of the local Xprint V7 0 domain for all partner gateways you can deactivate the import of jobs for the local gateway e To deactivate the import of jobs via the local gateway enter the following command xpchange gtw gateway gi OFF Deactivating the import of jobs via one gateway connection only If you want to temporarily deny access to the resources of the local Xprint V7 0 domain to only one of several partner gateways you can remove it from the list of allowed gateways of the responsible local gateway Proceed as follows e Deactivate the local gateway to which the partner gateway is assigned xpchange gtw local_gw stN e Remove the partner gateway from the list of allowed gateways xpmod gtw local_gw ag partner_gw e Reactivate the local gateway xpchange gtw local_gw U23841 J Z915 6 76 231 Administering gateways Interoperability 7 4 4 Activating a gateway Three points are important for activating a gateway Activation of the loc
229. o display a list of all the available servers in order to select one for your supervisor or to define a unique name use the following command xpshow srv A list of all the defined servers is displayed which has the following structure Name User perm Host Administrator srv_colorado colorado root missouri_server missouri xprintadm delaware_srv delaware root e f you want to define a new server on your system enter the following command xpadd srv server_name Defining a supervisor e lf the new printer on your system requires its own supervisor you can now define this supervisor with the following command xpadd spv supervisor_name se server_name Assign a unique name to the supervisor and specify with server_name which server is to manage your supervisor 116 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering devices Configuring printers e First use the checklist in the Appendix on page 263 to check if all the required preparatory steps for adding printers have been taken or if you want to use any of the further configuration options mentioned there forms filters permission lists etc e f you want to display a list of all the printers available in order to define a unique device name for your printer use the following command xpshow dev A list of all the defined printers is displayed which has the following structure Name PCL Default form Host Administrator printerl POSTSCRI
230. oduction to administering Xprint V7 0 starting on page 67 This chapter provides an introduction to managing Xprint V7 0 and describes the basic aspects of this task Chapter 6 Configuring Xprint V7 0 starting on page 95 This chapter describes how to configure Xprint V7 0 on a stand alone system or in a network using the Xprint V7 0 commands Furthermore it tells you how to manipulate the various Xprint V7 0 objects in order to achieve specific goals Chapter 7 Interoperability starting on page 207 This chapter describes the possible ways of having Xprint V7 0 interact with other spooler systems Chapter 8 Installing Xprint V7 0 on page 235 This chapter tells you how to install Xprint V7 0 on your system and what to consider when doing this U23841 J Z915 6 76 Preface Notational conventions e Chapter 9 Xprint V7 0 for Windows on page 249 While the other chapters of this manual describe Xprint V7 0 on UNIX systems this one presents the differences on the Windows platforms e The Appendix starting on page 259 contains important tables summaries and a worksheet for configuring Xprint V7 0 e The glossary explains the most important terms in connection with Xprint V7 0 e The index helps you to quickly find the information you need 1 3 Notational conventions The following notational conventions are used throughout this manual Convention Use double quo
231. oes not allow polling or handshaking is connected directly to a LAN In the event of a PowerOFF error message on the printer Xprint V7 0 by default restarts the job with the last sent page However as the last page sent is not necessarily the last printed page the rule above is more useful In the case of a PowerOFF error message the document is spooled in again if the connection cannot be re established within 15 minutes the printer is set to the status NOT_ACTIVE so that no more print jobs can be sent to it Now the printer can be switched back on and or the problem can be eliminated e When you have fully defined your recovery rules save your file e Add the new recovery rule to the Xprint V7 0 system xpadd rec rule_name fi rule_file ca comment where rule_name is aname you want to assign to a set of new recovery rules in the Xprint V7 0 system and rule_file specifies the file name of the source file you have created If this file is not located in the Xprint V7 0 directory opt Xprint RR you must specify the absolute path name With comment you can specify a comment for example on the purpose of this rule which can be useful for later administration of recovery rules Example To add the recovery rule RR1 from the recovery rules file opt Xprint RR my_RR_1 xpadd rec RR1 fi my_RR_1 U23841 J Z915 6 76 189 Administering recovery rules Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 14 2 Assigning a recovery rule to a printer
232. of a number of lines each of which corresponds to one entry The entries could read as follows SNI 4007 EPSON LQ EPSON LQ NONE 9600 8 XON N SERIAL SNI 4009 EPSON FX EPSON FX NONE 9600 8 ETX N SERIAL SNI 4009 PROPRINTER PROPRINTER NONE 9600 8 XON N SERIAL SNI 4010 EPSON LQ EPSON LQ NONE 9600 8 XON N SERIAL SNI 4011 ECMA 9097 E 9097 NONE 9600 8 XON Y SERIAL users only Each entry consists of nine fields which are separated by the exclamation mark The individual fields have the following meanings Field Meaning 1 Printer type the name under which the printer can be selected For new entries any name can be used 2 Emulation if a printer supports more than one emulation a separate entry with the same printer type and a different emulation should be specified for each different emulation 3 PCL here the name of the PCL suitable for the printer type and emulation is specified If this PCL is not yet defined in the Xprint V7 0 configuration xpconf_dev will add it 4 Parity for a connection via a serial interface the type of parity bit must be specified here Possible values are ODD EVEN and NONE 5 Baud rate for a connection via a serial interface the baud rate of the connection is specified here Table 11 conf_dev file 112 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuri
233. ommand can be used to store in a file privileged users accounts and passwords that Xprint V7 0 will use later to gain access to the encrypted data Two different kinds of accounts can be stored Personal user accounts can be stored by all users in a Xprint V7 0 data file These accounts and passwords are coded and writen in the file users dat inthe subdirectory Xprint V7 0 data ENC on the local host A default account can be created by an administrator Only one default account is supported each new default account replaces the preceding one This information is coded and writen in the file default dat inthe subdi rectory Xprint V7 0 data ENC on the local host When a job is sent Xprint V7 0 firstly checks the job owner s access rights to the file to print If the job owner has not enough rights to view the encrypted file the job is rejected with an access error message If the file to print is encryted then Xprint V7 0 checks if an account exists for the job owner in the users dat file If not Xprint V7 0 tries to use the account from the default dat file If no privileged user account can be used for the current job the job is refused and the user is suggested to use the cp option xpsetuser command can be used at any time This command is also invoked automatically in graphical mode at the end of installation Example The file d bills june prt is encrypted by user editor The file d bills april prt is
234. onal functions you can find out the status of jobs you have sent to a BSD server you can remove jobs you have sent to the BSD spooler system from that system you can display the status of the BSD print queue It therefore makes sense to use fast filters for sending print jobs to a BSD system however if you want to have access to the full BSD functionality you must use gateways This only works if the local BSD gateway is defined on the host of the printer that uses the fast filter bsd Every BSD user should be represented by a BSD gateway of the type PARTNER Furthermore the gateway of the type LOCAL which receives the BSD jobs must allow the spoolin of jobs from this partner This means the ag option must be set to ALL for the local gateway or the name of the gateway of the type PARTNER must be specified directly Every Xprint V7 0 or DPRINT domain from which jobs can be submitted for the local domain must be represented by a gateway of the type GIP2 PARTNER Furthermore the local gateway which receives a GIP2 job must allow the spoolin of jobs from this partner This means the ag option must be set to ALL for the local gateway or the name of the gateway of the type GIP2 PARTNER must be entered specifically No two gateways of the type LOCAL with the same port number ga can run on one host at any one time This is prevented by the network U23841 J Z915 6 76 93 6 Configuring Xprint V7 0 This c
235. ontents after a given delay The information accuracy is determined according to two extended options of the host object where the SNMP agent is running XP_CM_POLL_TIME period for devices and hosts state refreshing in the Cache area This time determines the maximum time before detection of a host no longer reachable or of a DEVICE_ERROR state occurring on another host than the SNMP system The value must be a number expressing the time in seconds The default value is 300 5 min A value 0 disables this refresh operation and could lead to incorrect states of devices and hosts XP_CM_DISABLE_JOBS When the monitoring of jobs via the SNMP agent is not requested performances will highly improve A non null value disable the monitoring of jobs and a value of 0 resets to the default behaviour This option is only taken into account at startup U23841 J Z915 6 76 269 Axis box support Appendix XP_SNMP_SYNC_TIME Validity period for the SNMP agent copy of the Xprint V7 0 information Any access to Xprint V7 0 agent after this time will enforce a resynchronization of the SNMP agent copy with the Cache Area The value must be number expressing the time in seconds The default value is 10 10 seconds The value 0 means that the resynchronization with the Cache information occurs at each SNMP access The installation aspects are detailed in the release notice Axis box support Introduction Two axis
236. oot e Stop the Xprint V7 0 system xpstop e Rename the host xppatch hostname oldname newname dg n oldname is the host name to be changed newname is the name that is to replace oldname The dg n option allows you to control the error message output of the Xppatch command For n use the values 0 1 or 2 where 0 causes only error messages to be written to stderr while 1 and 2 cause any additional messages to be output during command execution to log the process 6 2 2 Introducing Xprint V7 0 into a network Introducing Xprint V7 0 into an existing network or configuring a new network for Xprint V7 0 is in most cases done by one person who is referred to below as the Xprint V7 0 administrator This section is only intended for the Xprint V7 0 administrator The Xprint V7 0 administrator may be someone who is only responsible for managing Xprint V7 0 or he she may be one of the system administrators of the computers involved If you as the Xprint V7 0 adminis trator want to introduce Xprint V7 0 into an existing network you must perform the following tasks in the order given below first study the network structure define a primary master host which first manages the Xprint V7 0 database later you can specify additional computers which are to serve as reserve masters in case the defined master fails For more information on the host hierarchy see the section Xprint V7 0 objects on page 9 configure Xprint
237. options jt te and sx cannot be used for job selection Supervisors With the st option you can select supervisors with a specific status possible values are ACTIVE or NOT_ACTIVE Servers With the st option you can select servers with a specific status possible values are ACTIVE NOT_ACTIVE or SHUTDOWN With the si option you can select servers with a specific spoolin state possible values are ON or OFF With the so option you can select servers with a specific spoolout state possible values are ON or OFF Gateways You can use the st option to select gateways with a specific status possible values are ACTIVE and NOT_ACTIVE You can use the gi option to select those gateways which have a specified gateway input status possible values are ON and OFF You can use the go option to select those gateways which have a specified gateway output status possible values are ON and OFF Hosts The options po and pd cannot be used for selecting hosts SNMP Agent The Xprint V7 0 SNMP sub agent is based on the UCD SNMP NET SNMP software on Linux and Unix platforms and on the SNMP Microsoft service on Windows NT and Windows 2000 268 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Appendix SNMP Agent The Xprint V7 0 objects supported by the SNMP agent are hosts devices device groups servers supervisors gateways and jobs For each of these objects there is a table in the Xprint V7 0 MIB These tables contain al
238. opy dgr groupl group2 To set up a new group group2 based on the existing group groupl keeping all printers except for printers xpcopy dgr groupl group2 d1l printer3 128 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering printer groups 6 5 2 Adding a printer to a printer group If you want to add a printer to a printer group this printer must already be configured in the spooler system If this is not the case you must add the printer with the xpadd dev command for more detailed information on this see the section Adding a printer on page 116 Proceed as follows e Add additional printers to the printer group xpmod dgr selection d1 new_printer If selection is not specified the command refers to all the printer groups in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer groups to be added or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant printer groups are selected Example To add the printers printer4 and printer5 to the printer group groupl xpadd dgr groupl dl printer4 printerd5 6 5 3 Removing a printer from a printer group The xpmod dgr command allows you to delete any printer you manage from a printer group that you have access to Proceed as follows e Remove the printer xpmod dgr selection dl printer_na
239. or non numerical arguments Examples To delete all print jobs for printer printer xpdel job scl de printer1 52 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Managing print jobs Selecting a print job To display all print jobs with the priority 5 and the content type SIMPLE xpshow job scl pr 5 ct SIMPLE To display all print jobs for which the option cp was specified xpshow job scl cp or xpshow job scl cp To display all the print jobs for which the option cp was not specified xpshow job scl cp U23841 J Z915 6 76 53 Selecting a print job Managing print jobs Examples of the output formats SHORT and LONG To obtain a SHORT display enter the following command xpshow job scl de printerl di SHORT You will obtain the following display L jid Global jid Originator Destination Form fc pr 1 si511 7 xprintadm printerl 001 001 To obtain a LONG display enter the following command xpshow job scl de printerl di LONG You will obtain the following display LOCAL JOB ID 2 Global job id si511 8 si511 etc passwd Permanent job id d241psap 0000000036 2 Document references etc passwd Destination printerl pcl Original job size 2788 Candidate printers printerl Form Font No validation RESET Job priority 020 File copies 001 Page copies 001 Page select From string To string Originator xprintadm Security level
240. other objects are defined There are permission lists for users USER and forms FORM and Xprint V7 0 distinguishes two types of permission list allowed lists and denied lists The former comprise lists of users or forms that are allowed to access specific objects e g printers or which may be used on the printers to which the list is assigned respectively The latter list objects which are not allowed to access specific objects for example printers or which may not be used on the printers to which the list is assigned respec tively Print job When one or more files are sent off for printing via the xpadd command or the menu interface these are combined to form an object named print job and subsequently treated as such by Xprint V7 0 At spoolin every print job is assigned a job identifier under which it can later be addressed e g to change the formatting Printer capability list See PCL Printer group You can combine several printers to form a printer group Users can then send a job to this group whereupon the job will be printed on the first printer in the group to become available This avoids long wait times which might occur if only one destination printer is selected Nevertheless users can still address any printer in a group individually Prompt When the system is started in command mode or in a shell window a character sequence appears on the screen indicating that the command interpreter is ready for
241. ou want to display or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see the section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant printers are selected If you do not specify selection information on all printers will be displayed e Deactivate the printer xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE e Cancel the assignment of the filter to the printer xpmod dev selection f1 e Reactivate the printer x pchange dev selection 170 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering public loadable resources 6 11 Administering public loadable resources Loadable resources are objects containing information about fonts backgrounds overlays etc They can be downloaded to a printer separately from the document s that use them This can speed up the printing process and improve job recovery For full details see Chapter 4 in the Reference Manual Public loadable resources which are available throughout the entire system can only be defined by the Xprint V7 0 administrator or a local Xprint V7 0 administrator It is possible however for all users to define private loadable resources on their local hosts If you want to Read create resources the section Creating a Loadable Resource in Chapter 4 of the Reference Manual define a loadable resource the section Defining a loadable resource on p
242. out options and arguments the command starts a dialog with the user in which it asks for all the required information using selection menus The xprdir command does not work if Xprint V7 0 is not active on the host on which the new printer is configured It returns the same error messages as the commands xpchange and xpmod i 64 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Managing print jobs Deleting print jobs 4 5 Deleting print jobs You can delete a print job that is in the print queue or is being printed e To delete a print job use the xpdel command xpdel selection For selection you can either specify a list of job identifiers or with the option scl selection_criteria_list define a list of criteria according to which the jobs to be deleted are to be selected Every entry in this list consists of an option of the xpadd job command with a value assigned to it For more information see the section Selection criteria list on page 266 of the Appendix Examples To delete the print jobs 1 3 7 and 9 local ID xpdel job 137 9 To delete the print jobs si_mfs1 2 and si_mfs1 4 global ID xpdel job si_mfs 2 si_mfs 4 To delete all print jobs with the attributes destination printer3 and form AD5LAND xpdel job scl de printer3 fm A5LAND U23841 J Z915 6 76 65 5 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 This chapter describes the concepts of Xprint V7 0 which you must b
243. p SansSerif hm 12 la INTERNATIONAL To define the typeface my_font on the basis of the GENERIC font setting the character pitch to 10 cpi and the print quality to HIGH xpcopy fnt GENERIC my_font hm 10 pq HIGH U23841 J Z915 6 76 153 Administering fonts Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 8 2 Deleting a font To delete a font from the system proceed as follows You can only delete a font if it is not connected to other objects e g assigned to a form as the default font To display any references use the following command xpshow fnt font diR For font you specify exactly one font name you want to delete If you want to delete several fonts you must repeat this command for each of these fonts If references to the font are displayed you must remove these by modifying the displayed objects accordingly Delete the font s with the following command xpdel fnt selection For selection you can either specify a list of font names or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list option See section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the fonts to be deleted are selected If selection is not specified all fonts except GENERIC are deleted Note The default font GENERIC supplied with the Xprint V7 0 package cannot be deleted even by the Xprint V7 0 administrator Neither can those fonts be deleted that are still referenced by other objects
244. padd usr user_IDs ho hosts For user_IDs you can specify either a single user or a list of users Now Xprint V7 0 knows the specified users and you can grant them specific privileges By additionally specifying a list of hosts with the ho hosts option you can allow users to access jobs they have submitted on one of these hosts from any other of the specified hosts U23841 J Z915 6 76 133 Administering users Configuring Xprint V7 0 These users do not have to be registered as SINIX users on the specified hosts If the ho option is not specified only the local host is added to the list Examples To add user smith locally to the Xprint V7 0 system xpadd usr smith The Xprint V7 0 administrator enters the following command on a spooler system with the hosts colorado nashua and hudson xpadd usr smith ho colorado nashua smith is now an Xprint V7 0 user of host colorado and host nashua If he sends a job from host colorado to the system he can log in to host nashua and access this job for example to modify the job priority He cannot do this from host hudson as there the Xprint V7 0 system considers him to be a different user with the ID smith 6 6 2 Entering a defined user for other hosts If an already defined user is to be able to access his her jobs from other hosts as well for example because he she has a user ID on a newly added host the host list can be extended e Enter the new host in the user s
245. pecification This option specifies whether a print job is to be printed in PORTRAIT or in LANDSCAPE format U23841 J Z915 6 76 25 Using Xprint V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Defining the margin settings When printing under Xprint V7 0 you can also define which part of a page is to be printed on The following figure provides an overview of the possible settings and is followed by a description of the individual options I lt Pw p a A T B L and R mark the T printer dependent non tm printable area Im 4 The values for the non gt lt Il gt printable margin are retrieved from the values nppl and np11 of the corresponding PCL object T B nppl 2 L R npll 2 ph L pl n y v B Figure 5 Margin settings 26 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options Xprint V7 0 always defines its printable area by means of the logical page specified with the options p1 page length and 11 line length The margin options tm top margin and 1m left margin can also be used for defining the printable area within the physical page If only the margin settings tm and 1m are specified the bottom and right margin of the logical page are defined via the non printable area If a logical page is not given the size of the printable area is calculated from the size of the physical page ph for
246. pecified the command refers to all the users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the users whose privileges or print quota you want to view or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant users are selected The type of information displayed can be selected with the di display option Possible values for display include LONG and SHORT default SHORT display Name Jobs Pages Copies Prio Accounting smith 75 500 25 80 SET jones 75 500 25 90 SET brown 100 2000 50 100 SET LONG display NAME jones Hosts snill 24 Allowed jobs 100 Maximum priority 100 Allowed pages 2000 Allowed copies 50 Security level CONFIDENTIAL Update accounting yes Privileges NONE Comment Status display of the current print quotas e You can display the current state of the print quota for each user in the system To do this use the following command xpstat usr selection di display 140 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering users If selection is not specified the command refers to all the users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the users whose print quota state you want to view or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list o
247. permission lists are selected U23841 J Z915 6 76 147 Administering permission lists Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 7 4 Granting or denying specific users access to a printer If you want to grant only specific users access to a printer you can assign a permission list to the printer To do this proceed as follows e Select a suitable allowed list containing exactly those users who are to be granted access to the printer or select a denied list containing all those users who are to be denied access to the printer respectively A list of all permission lists can be displayed with the following command xpshow prm If there is no suitable list defined in the Xprint V7 0 system you can create one yourself see section Creating a permission list on page 144 e Deactivate the desired printer s xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE If selection is not specified the command refers to all the printers in the local Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printers you want to assign a permission list to or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant printers are selected e Assign the selected permission list to the desired printer s xpmod dev selection up list_name list_name is the name of the selected permission list e Reactivate the prin
248. placed by another one you must make sure that the new PCL supports the attributes of the default form and the assigned default font used on the printer If this is not the case the xpmod command is rejected e Now reactivate the printer xpchange dev selection Examples To add the printer group4 address dev 1p3 supervisor marcus assigning to it the PCL HP LASERJET xpadd dev group4 da dev 1p3 su marcus pc HP LASERJET To assign to the printer printer4 a different PCL e g POSTSCRIPT xpchange dev printer4 st NOT ACTIVE xpmod dev printer4 pc POSTSCRIPT ct xpchange dev printer4 Tocancel the assignment of the PCL POSTSCRIPT to the printer printer1 and assign to it the PCL GENERIC instead xpchange dev printerl st NOT ACTIVE xpmod dev printerl pc GENERIC ct SIMPLE xpchange dev printerl 184 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering PCLs 6 13 5 Defining a PCL yourself Except for the default PCL GENERIC the PCLs supplied with Xprint V7 0 can be modified Furthermore you can also define your own PCLs in order to provide optimum communication between the Xprint V7 0 system and the printer To do this you must simply give Xprint V7 0 information on the attributes of the printer and how these are selected The attributes are defined and saved ina PCL file so that the Xprint V7 0 system can access the information at any time To define a PCL yourself you must create
249. ported by the printer e g xpshow pcl HP LASERJET di LONG e A font always consists of several components such as typeface style or l font size You can override these at any time for example by modifying the font size If you often want to print with such customized settings you can also define a special job template for this purpose For more detailed infor mation see section Defining customized job templates on page 46 tp typeface This option selects the specified typeface for the print job Printers are supplied with a number of predefined typefaces A list of the typefaces available for your printer under Xprint V7 0 can be displayed using the command xpshow pcl di LONG CS character_style You can choose between two character styles STRAIGHT and ITALICS The default is STRAIGHT hm horizontal _motion The value horizontal_motion specifies the number of characters printed horizontally per inch 24 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options vM vertical_motion This option is used to specify the number of lines to be printed per inch Selecting the layup Many printers can print in PORTRAIT and in LANDSCAPE format In most cases the default is PORTRAIT The following figure illustrates the possible settings Figure 4 Layup settings The page layup can be changed with the following option Is layup_s
250. pply is refilled By means of a recovery rule you could define a different procedure to suspend the print job and set the printer to NOT_ACTIVE until the administrator intervenes for example You can define modify and delete recovery rules e Servers srv Servers are the Xprint V7 0 objects which administer incoming print jobs and are responsible for scheduling them Each server administers its own print queue which contains all the print jobs for the printers whose supervisors are controlled by the server You can define and delete servers and change their status e Supervisors spv A supervisor is directly responsible for controlling one or more printers It obtains the job data from the responsible server and forwards it to the backend program see entry Backend on page 273 in the glossary One supervisor may control several local printers As the system or Xprint V7 0 administrator you can set up and delete super visors and change their status e Users usr Xprint V7 0 differentiates between two types of user UNIX users who are not defined in the Xprint V7 0 system and Xprint V7 0 users who are defined in the Xprint V7 0 system UNIX users are all users of the UNIX system on which Xprint V7 0 is running the default settings for Xprint V7 0 apply to them If these settings are not sufficient the UNIX users can be defined in the Xprint V7 0 system More settings can be made for Xprint V7 0 users than for
251. print V7 0 database Job See print job Job identifier Every print job is automatically assigned a character combination called the job identifier when it is added to the print queue This job ID is required to make changes to a submitted job Job template A job template is an object which can store a sequence of specific options of the xpadd command which are used frequently for spooling in print jobs If a user specifies this job template when submitting a print job Xprint V7 0 automatically uses the predefined options of the template this saves the user the effort of specifying frequently recurring option sequences again and again Loadable Resource This is an Xprint V7 0 object that may be used for printing documents Resources are data that are document independent and loaded to the printer separately from the user s data Documents can then call downloaded resources 274 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Glossary Master host A master host holds the master copy of the Xprint V7 0 database When Xprint V7 0 is introduced in a network the first computer on which Xprint V7 0 is installed and started assumes the role of the active master host If Xprint V7 0 is terminated on the active master the next potential master host in what is called the host hierarchy assumes its function as active master host Migrated files These are files stored on a remote media in order to extend disk space using the remote storage facility fro
252. print V7 0 domain from host A i e say the printers 1 and 2 the Xprint V7 0 users and also the four hosts themselves 68 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Responsibilities The system administrator of host B can administer all those Xprint V7 0 objects for which host B is defined as the administration host Similarly the local Xprint V7 0 administrator of host C can only administer those Xprint V7 0 objects for which host C is defined as the administration host However this also means that for example on a host which is not intercon nected with other hosts via a network Xprint V7 0 can be administered entirely by the Xprint V7 0 administrator the system administrator or a specially configured local Xprint V7 0 administrator with the exception of starting Xprint V7 0 which is restricted to the system administrator In this manual the generic terms user and administrator are used as shown in the following table unless a specific type of user is being referred to In this case the type is expressly specified Term Type of user user UNIX user Xprint V7 0 user administrator local Xprint V7 0 administrator system administrator Xprint V7 0 administrator Table 4 Types of users Please note that only the Xprint V7 0 administrator is allowed to admin ister objects on remote hosts If in the course of this manual an object is to be manipulated by an administrator
253. print V7 0 users access by defining for every printer of the BSD system a local printer which forwards the print jobs to the BSD system like an lpr client This functionality is available in any Xprint V7 0 system including those not installed as network systems In such a case access to the BSD system is effected via a fast filter which is assigned to the local pseudo printer Xprint V7 0 also allows you to define what are called gateways to other Xprint V7 0 systems Gateways allow bidirectional connections between Xprint V7 0 and other spooler systems Such gateways can only be defined if the gateway package of Xprint V7 0 was purchased 208 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Accessing BSD printers g 7 2 Accessing BSD printers This section describes how you can allow access to the printers of a BSD spooler from within Xprint V7 0 via the fast filter bsd 7 2 1 Basic information You can allow users of the local Xprint V7 0 domain access to BSD printers which meet the following requirements the printers are defined on a computer with a BSD printer spooler e g a BSD system Novell Netware Windows NT Servers Windows 2000 Servers LINUX etc an lpd process is running on the remote system which allows other computers to use the printers defined there your Xprint V7 0 domain is connected to the remote system via a network and the TCP IP protocol can be checked with the ping command atleast one
254. ption see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the users are selected For host specify the name of the hosts from which the user is no longer to have access to the print jobs of the other hosts Examples To delete host delaware from the host list of user smith xpmod usr smith ho delaware To delete host missouri from the host list of all users xpmod usr ho missouri 6 6 4 Modifying user privileges The Xprint V7 0 administrator can also define the privileges of users when or after defining them There are a number of options available which can be used with the xpmod usr command described below or when defining the user with xpadd usr e Use the following command to modify the privileges of one or more users xpmod usr selection modifications If selection is not specified the command refers to all users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the user s whose privileges you want to modify or you can use the sc1 U23841 J Z915 6 76 135 Administering users Configuring Xprint V7 0 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant users are selected For modifications you can specify any combination of the following options With the option pv privileges you as
255. queue and moves in it according to its priority When it comes to the top position the printer to which the job is assigned is no longer available for other jobs Only when the print job is explicitly assigned the status ACTIVE xpchange job option st ACTIVE is printing started When the print job is completed the printer is released for use by other print jobs again xpchange WAITS TOP Foo 4 7 eas Xpada m Li soveoue ACTIVE ermar T print job a disappears L SUSPEND xpchange t xpchange Figure 8 States of print jobs Extended options The ex flag has been introduced to extend the set of pre defined object attributes in a flexible way The purpose of this option is twofold e adapt product behavior via predefined variables e collect and store any interesting information for the user or the administrator in a structured way Example the room number where the printer is located the page cost of a printer 38 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options the e mail adress of a user the operating system of a host It consists in a list of strings that can be stored in all Xprint V7 0 objects Each string must respect the following format lt variable gt lt value gt Example lt command_name gt lt object_type gt name Loperand Loptions ex variablel valuel variable2 value2
256. r printer group are displayed in such a case depends on the gateway type With the option di display you can determine the scope of the display as described for print jobs in the section Displaying print jobs on page 55 Besides the standard values SHORT LONG and specifying a list of output parameters as for print jobs you can also use the keyword REFERENCED_BY here which returns a list of the Xprint V7 0 objects referring to the specified object If you specify the option di REFERENCED_BY short diR you must specify exactly one object of the desired type This list is useful if you want to remove an Xprint V7 0 object from the Xprint V7 0 system as you can only remove an object if it is no longer referenced by any other object U23841 J Z915 6 76 83 Administrative tasks under Xprint Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Examples in this case for printer groups To display the status of the printer group group1 xpstat dgr groupl NAME Spoolin groupl ON Date of last modification Tue Dec 20 11 37 17 1994 Justification To display the definition of the printer group group1 in a complete list xpshow dgr groupl di LONG This returns for example the following output NAME groupl Host colorado Administrator xprintadm Device list printerl printer2 User permission User comment The printer group for all users Administrator comment To display a short list of all the printe
257. r execution on a printer in a printer group the Rank field contains its position in the job queue of the printer with the lowest load in this printer group ul e 58 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Managing print jobs Displaying print jobs Display examples Job status display SHORT L jid Global jid Destination Rank Percentage State 1 sel 511 P1 0001 000 WAIT Job status display LONG LOCAL JOB ID 3 Global job id d241s052_006 14 State SUSPEND State information Destination hplj4m Rank 1 Requested copies 1 Copies printed 0 already printed 0 Last printed page 0 Related document To display print job information containing only the attributes Destination and Release time use the following command xpshow di de at You will obtain a display similar to the following 1 sel 14 P1 Thu Aug 2 sel 16 P1 Thu Aug To define and then apply the display template my_template which is to include the job ID local ID files to be printed destination printer form used and the pages to be printed Open the file Xprint V7 0 and enter the following line my_template id 1j dr de fm ps Display information on all print jobs using the display template my_templ ate xpshow job di my_template Display 9 sel 14 9 tmp filel P1 10 sel 16 10 tmp file2 P1 To globally change the display of the xpshow command such that the individual fields are not truncated and are separated by
258. r groups available xpshow dgr This could return the following output Name User perm Host Administrator groupl missouri xprintadm group2 delaware xprintadm To display all the references to the printer group groupl1 xpshow dgr groupl di REFERENCED_BY The output might appear as follows Level Name Type 1 hostl hos This output shows that an object of type host namely the host host1 still refers to the group group1 The printer group can only be removed when the object host1 has been modified such that the reference to group is canceled 84 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Administrative tasks under Xprint 5 3 6 Administering Xprint V7 0 This section describes a few basic administration tasks concerning Xprint V7 0 If you want to Read start Xprint V7 0 section Administering Xprint V7 0 on page 85 terminate Xprint V7 0 section Administering Xprint V7 0 on page 86 reinitialize the Xprint V7 0 section Administering Xprint V7 0 on database page 86 select a language section Administering Xprint V7 0 on page 87 enable auditing users only section Auditing in the appendix of the Reference Manual enable logging users only section Logging in the appendix of the Reference Manual Table 5 Basic administration tasks Starting Xprint V7 0 Only the system administrator root can start
259. r of supervisors by default server Initialisation time before xpadd dev Possible values from 1 to 15 Behaviour if unspecified 3 is used Behaviour if a value larger than 15 is specified 15 is used XP_DEV_BY_DFTSPV Description maximum number of devices by default supervisor 90 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Rules for configuring the system Initialisation time before xpadd dev Possible values from 1 to 15 Behaviour if unspecified 15 is used Behaviour if a value larger than 15 is specified 15 is used Printers Each printer connected to the Xprint V7 0 system must be defined in the database in order to be accessible Furthermore the host to which the printer is attached must be defined in the Xprint V7 0 database Access to systems via the BSD LPD protocol is effected from one or more pseudo printers in Xprint V7 0 by means of the fast filter bsd Another possible way of accessing the printers directly is via the BSD gateway The main difference between these two methods is the fact that in the case of the fast filter bsd the document is formatted e g font paper layup while print jobs sent via the gateway are not converted Access to printers via the network address is effected from one or more Xprint V7 0 devices which have LAN defined as the connection type in their device definition As any host can be specified you are advised to use the host with the best availability If a
260. r the question mark representing any character This string is used for the host list in the etc hosts file i e if the option op d241p is specified the partner gateway represents all the hosts in the etc hosts list which begin with d241p Allowing print jobs to be submitted by the BSD spooler If you want to allow users of the BSD spooler to submit print jobs for local printers via the gateway the partner gateway must be defined as an allowed gateway at the local gateway To do this use the following command xpmod gtw local_gw ag bsd_partner With this command the partner gateway bsd_partner is assigned to the local gateway Jocal_gw as an allowed gateway Only the BSD systems which are connected to the local Xprint V7 0 domain via allowed partner gateways are allowed to use its print services You can also define all partner gateways as allowed gateways by using the keyword ALL xpmod gtw local_gw ag ALL 218 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Gateways In this case only the value ALL needs to be specified with the ag option Therefore the character is not specified after the ag option in the example above e Please note that when the option ag ALL is used any partner gateway l added is automatically given the permission to contact the local gateway Activating the gateway connection To be able to print via the gateways the corresponding local gateway must be activated Ac
261. re admin istered by the new host colorado xpmod flt scl pc POSTSCRIPT ah nile 168 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering filters 6 10 4 Assigning a filter to a printer If you frequently use with a printer a specific form which uses a particular format it might be useful to assign the printer a special filter for this li Only fast filters can be assigned to printers Proceed as follows Check the printer status xpstat dev selection For selection either specify a list of the printers whose status you want to display or use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant printers are selected If you do not specify selection information on all printers will be displayed e f necessary deactivate the printer xpchange dev selection st NOT_ACTIVE e Assign the relevant filter to the printer xpmod dev selection f1 filter_name For filter_name specify the name of the relevant filter e Reactivate the printer xpchange dev selection U23841 J Z915 6 76 169 Administering filters Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 10 5 Removing a filter from a printer To remove a filter from a printer proceed as follows e Check whether the relevant printer is activated xpstat dev selection For selection you can either specify a list of the printers y
262. re described below Options representing Boolean values e g the option aa for printers which switches on automatic activation can be removed by specifying a minus sign after the option example xpmod dev printerl aa Options defining lists e g the d1 option for printer groups which defines the printers belonging to this group can be modified in three different ways Ifa minus sign is specified after the option the objects specified behind it are removed from the list example xpmod dgr pgroup1 d1 printer4 printer5 Ifa plus sign is specified after the option the objects specified behind it are added to the list example xpmod dgr pgroupl d1 printer6 Ifthe objects are specified directly after the option the existing list is replaced by the specified objects example xpmod dgr pgroup2 d1 printerl printer2 printer 6 U23841 J Z915 6 76 81 Administrative tasks under Xprint Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 5 3 4 Changing the status of Xprint V7 0 objects With the xpchange command you can change the dynamic data of Xprint V7 0 objects such as printer states or the states of the current user print quotas For a detailed description of using this command for each object type see the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual With some objects the status can assume several levels i e they have a global status and subordinate substates A printer for example has a globa
263. re selected If you de activate a printer with the st option spoolin and spoolout printing are also de activated With the option ju justification you specify a comment justifying the new spoolin status You can display this comment with the xpstat dev command The comment is deleted automatically when the st option is changed again with the xpchange dev command 118 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering devices Deactivating spoolin You can deactivate a printer but still have it print the print jobs waiting in the print queue To do this set its spoolin status to OFF In this case all print jobs which have the status ACTIVE or WAIT are still printed however at the same time you lock the spoolin of new print jobs with this command e Use the following command xpchange dev selection si OFF ju justification The si option stands for spoolin Deactivating printing If a printer is not available for a short period of time only e g because the toner needs to be refilled you can still submit print jobs which will be printed when the printer becomes available again e Use the following command xpchange dev selection so OFF ju justification The so option stands for spoolout Examples To deactivate the printer printer1 with the justification that the printer is being repaired xpchange dev printerl st NOT_ACTIVE ju printer is being repaired To deactiva
264. ready existing database has been found to be defective If an initialization is started even though there is an old database this old database is backed up in the directory DB backup whether it is defective or not To restore such a backup database you must first deactivate the Xprint V7 0 system Then you must delete the directory config DB and rename the directory config DB backup to config DB Automatic configuration of printers Xprint V7 0 allows you to have printers configured automatically during instal lation of the packages If you select this option you will be asked to select one or more printers from a menu in the course of the installation process To find out which devices are supported see the section Predefined printers and PCLs in the Reference Manual 242 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Installing Xprint V7 0 Installation users only 8 5 2 Product licensing The execution and some features of Xprint V7 0 are protected by a license key When you have installed Xprint V7 0 you can use its full functionality without a key for an evaluation period At the end of this period Xprint V7 0 will become unusable unless a valid key has been installed 8 5 3 Types of licenses Different types of licenses can be supplied depending on the Xprint V7 0 entities you need to configure on your host the number of devices to be controlled or the extra features you wish to use Basic licenses The basic licenses are the followin
265. rinter can handle Furthermore a PCL also contains technical characteristics of the printer such as its connection protocol Xprint V7 0 is supplied with a substantial number of PCLs such as those for different types of HP LaserJet printer for PostScript printers IBM ProPrinters and all Siemens Nixdorf printers The Appendix of this manual contains a list of all the available PCLs and the printers they support These PCLs are located in the file var spool Xprint config pcl xpterm It is possible that only some of them are installed as Xprint V7 0 objects in your system You can display a list of the available PCLs with the xpshow pcl command To define further PCLs use the xpadd pcl command There is also a standard printer capability list the PCL GENERIC This enables you to a certain extent to also use printers for which there is no special PCL available The PCL GENERIC can be neither deleted nor modified If you want to Read add a PCL section Adding a PCL on page 180 delete a PCL section Deleting a PCL on page 181 add comments to PCLs to provide a__ section Assigning a comment to a better overview PCL on page 182 assign a PCL to a printer section Assigning a PCL to a printer on page 183 define a PCL yourself section Defining a PCL yourself on page 185 Table 21 Administering PCLs U23841 J Z915 6 76 179 Administering PCLs Configuring Xprint V7
266. rinting SINGLE is set 28 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Using Xprint V7 0 options Selecting specific character sets Depending on the PCL a printer supports a number of special character sets e g ENGLISH FRENCH INTERNATIONAL etc If you want a job to be printed using a specific character set table e g the character set INTERNATIONAL you must specify this with the option la character_set The supported character sets can be seen in the Language field of the output of the xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG command Examples To print the document file with a left margin of 5 cm and a top margin of 34 mm xpadd dr filel Im 5c tm 34m To print the file fi1e1 double sided with a vertical gutter xpadd dr filel sd DOUBLE_WIDE To print file english created using the English character set using the character set INTERNATIONAL xpadd dr english la INTERNATIONAL U23841 J Z915 6 76 29 Using Xprint V7 0 options Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 3 4 4 Using Loadable Resources The figure below gives a simplified view of how loadable resources work This is explained more fully in the following paragraphs Data document Loadable Resources This is sample text This is a a a 7 another line This is sample text This is another line of sample Fo nt text This is a further line of sam ple text This is one more line of sample text This is a further line l
267. ription Ignore Ignore error Retry Repeat polling of printer status until READY is returned Restart Restart with last printed page Stop Set device to NOT_ACTIVE and the job to INTERRUPTED Suspend Stop active job Respool Print last document again Table 24 Actions for specific errors The following examples illustrate the structure of a typical recovery rule Key Time Code Action Stop 600 stopped Retry stopped Stop In the above example the rule for stopped is applied if the printer is stopped by pressing the STOP PAUSE key for longer than 600 seconds Otherwise availability of the printer is checked again or the default action for the current error is used Retry Key Time Exception Action Stop 600 stopped i Retry stopped Stop 5 i Stop Stop In this example the rule for stopped is applied if the printer is stopped by pressing the STOP PAUSE key for longer than 600 seconds Then availability of the printer is checked again Retry or due to the character the status of the printer is set to NOT_ACTIVE Stop irrespective of the error code 188 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering recovery rules The asterisk stands for any error other than those specified earlier in the recovery rules file The asterisk must be specified as the last rule Key Time Exception Action PowerOFF 900 3 stopped Respool stopped Stop A printer which d
268. rt as many comment lines as you like which must start with the character The definition of a loadable resource starts with its name followed by any options allowed by xpadd Irs If a definition continues on the next line the current line must end with a backslash character Resources first have to be created with dedicated tools such as FGL or SIEFONT from Siemens These tools will generate the data to be downloaded to the printer The name of the generated file can be saved in a loadable resource object Each resource needs its own identifier in the printer This identifier has to be reflected in the resource object as the printer internal identifier The description of a resource can be registered in a loadable resource object Resources may be called from documents if they include printer commands that call the resource Examples The following example shows the definition of several loadable resource objects Private Xprint file Loadable resources everypage logo mylogo pi 101 pc HP LASERJET tp Overlay ec fi HOME Irs mylogo hp cr ALL mybckgrd pi 102 pc HP LASERJET tp Overlay ec fi HOME Irs mybckgrd hp Jobs can use the loadable resources as follows xpadd dr mydocument 1r mylogo xpadd dr mydocument 1r mylogo mybckgrd li If a private loadable resource has the same name as a predefined public loadable resource the private one is given preference when the name is selected
269. rver you must define a corresponding permission list This is described in the section Creating a permission list on page 144 Adding a completely new server e To add anew server to the system use the following command xpadd srv server_name ho host_name For server_name specify a unique name for the new server If the name already exists the command is rejected host_name represents the name of the remote host on which the server is to be added Only the Xprint V7 0 administrator can add a server on a remote host but root and subroot can administer this server e Activate the server xpchange srv server_name You must run this command as every new server is first set to OFF for all its states st si so and is therefore not available in the system The servers are activated automatically when Xprint V7 0 is started xpstart command When a server is activated for the first time Xprint V7 0 creates in the opt Xprint SV directory a subdirectory for this server which contains its name unless there is already a directory with the same name When adding a new server you can also use the options sp scheduling and up user_privileges to define which scheduling policy is to be used and which users can assign supervisors to the server see section Administering permission lists on page 143 For more detailed information refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual 194 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xpr
270. s the local job ID sel is the server name and 97 is the serial job ID on this server You should note these IDs in case you need to access the print job before its execution is completed If you do not know the ID of the print job you want to access you can request a list of all your print jobs see section Displaying print jobs on page 55 In addition the print job is always assigned a job title which is either the same as that of the print file in the case of a job with several files it is the name of the first file or which has been specified explicitly with the jt job_title option If you select a print job via its identifier you can use the number as well as the job title This is illustrated by the following example xpadd dr filel XP000002 Job lt 18 gt lt sel 97 gt added You can select this print job using the following methods pstat 18 pstat filel pstat sel 97 pstat sel filel x lt x kK amp e Note that unlike the job ID the job title is not always unique If there are l several jobs with the same title specifying this title selects all of them You can also use the wildcards and when specifying the job title These have the same meanings as with UNIX commands represents any number of characters represents exactly one character The following example selects all the print jobs at the server sel whose job title starts with da xpstat job sel da 50 U23841 J Z915
271. s well as a corresponding value The following options are available ah administration_host ca comment_for_administrator cu comment_for_user ft default_font je job_end_sheet js job_start_sheet 1 line_length 1 m left_margin 1s layup mf mounted font mm mount_method nt notification_delivery_threshold ph page_height p1 page_length pw page_width sd side_specification Sp job_separator_sheet tm top_margin Up user_permission For more information on these options refer to the description of the xpadd frm command in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Defining a form on the basis of an existing form A simple way of defining a new form is to copy an existing one to a form name If necessary you can also modify the new form at the same time U23841 J Z915 6 76 157 Administering forms Configuring Xprint V7 0 To copy a form use the following command xpcopy frm old_form_name new_form_name modifications old_form_name is the name of the existing form that is to be copied new_form_name is the name of the new form file modifications represents a list of modified attributes which are to be different for the new form Each entry in this list consists of an option of the xpadd frm command plus a corresponding value Examples To define a form etter with the values form layup portrait page height 297 mm page width 210 mm top margin 2 cm page length 24 cm
272. selection st NOT_ACTIVE where selection is the name of the server for which you want to grant or deny permissions This can be omitted if you want to deactivate all defined servers or you can define a selection criteria list according to which the relevant servers are selected e Assign to the server a permission list defining which other administrators are to be allowed to add modify or delete supervisors for this server xpmod srv selection up permission_list permission_list is the allowed or denied list to be assigned This permission list must already exist when you issue this command if necessary create a new one first see section Creating a permission list on page 144 e Reactivate the modified server xpchange srv selection The local privileges of root and subroot always take precedence over the permission list attached to the server This means that you can only protect a server from administrators from other hosts not from the administrators on the same host Example To allow jim subroot of host B to define supervisors and attach them to any server in the domain xpadd prm supervisor_administrator al jim xpchange srv st NOT_ACTIVE xpmod srv up supervisor_administrator U23841 J Z915 6 76 151 Administering fonts Configuring Xprint V7 0 xpchange srv 6 8 Administering fonts This section describes how to administer fonts in the Xprint V7 0 system The following table serves as a
273. setup 20 default identifier print job 49 define filter 165 job template 46 174 job template simplified loadable resource 171 new font 152 new font simplified new form 157 new form simplified new supervisor 200 new supervisor simplified 201 PCL 185 server 116 server simplified user 133 175 153 157 195 U23841 J Z915 6 76 281 Index delete filter 167 font 154 form 158 gateway 229 job template 177 loadable resource 173 PCL 181 print job 65 printer group 132 server 196 supervisor 205 user 137 determine network structure 97 104 display form 42 job templates 45 loadable resource 31 173 objects 55 printer 117 server 116 documents modify font 24 print 17 print directly 37 print parts 21 print several copies 35 use job template for printing 44 double sided printing 28 E e mail 5 Encrypted files 255 evaluation period 243 Extended options 38 delete 167 input data format 163 modify attributes 168 output data format 163 remove from printer 170 font 152 add 152 character pitch 72 character set 72 define 152 delete 154 GENERIC 154 155 line spacing vertical motion 72 modify attributes 155 modify for document 24 print quality 72 simplified definition 153 style 72 typeface 72 form 156 add 157 define new 157 delete 158 display 42 GENERIC 156 158 160 grant access 149 150 manual 41 modify attributes 160 simplified definition 157 G gateway activate 232 conf
274. several sections explaining the most important options for printing documents 3 1 Basic information This section provides an introduction to using the Xprint V7 0 commands their basic structure and how you can access the online help for these commands at any time Available Xprint V7 0 commands Xprint V7 0 provides a number of commands with which you can manipulate the Xprint V7 0 objects The following table shows the Xprint V7 0 commands you can call as a user Command Use xpadd adding print jobs xpchange changing the job status xpdel deleting print jobs xpmod modifying existing print jobs xpshow displaying information on Xprint V7 0 objects xpstat displaying the status of Xprint V7 0 objects Table 1 Xprint V7 0 commands As an ordinary user you can only use all these commands for the job object For all other objects you can only use the xpstat and xpshow commands Only the administrator can also use all the other commands for other objects U23841 J Z915 6 76 15 Basic information Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Structure of Xprint V7 0 commands This section describes the general structure of the Xprint V7 0 commands Command Object type Selection Options xpadd job dr filel ct SIMPLE xpshow job 13 di LONG xpdel job 13 Every Xprint V7 0 command is called using this format The name of the command e g xpadd is followed by the short identifier for th
275. sign specific privileges to a user Possible categories are ALL the user is given all privileges NONE default the user is granted no privileges ANY_DEVICE the user can access any printer even if defined otherwise in the permission list TOP the user is allowed to place his her print job at the top of the print queue With the option pr priority you can assign the maximum priority with which the user may spool in his her print jobs Xprint V7 0 then places the user s jobs in the print queue according to the priority assigned The priority range is 1 100 and the default value is UNDEFINED With the option a j allowed_jobs the Xprint V7 0 administrator can define how many jobs each individual user is allowed to print The default is NO_LIMIT With the option nc number_of_copies you define the maximum number of copies per user job The default is NO_LIMIT With the option ap allowed_pages you can define the maximum number of pages a user is allowed to print Once a user has reached this number of pages he she is no longer allowed to submit further print jobs The default is NO_LIMIT When the ua user accounting option is specified Xprint V7 0 will update and save the counter of the number of pages and jobs printed per user after the job is finished When a user has reached the limit of one of his her print quotas he she cannot print any more print jobs until his her counter is reset 136 U23841 J Z915 6 76
276. sor not processing any jobs 6 15 3 Changing the status of a server The status of a server can assume the values ACTIVE or NOT_ACTIVE or SHUTDOWN the spoolin status and the spoolout status can be either ON or OFF Proceed as follows e Find out the status of the server s xpstat srv selection For selection you can either specify a list of the servers whose status you want to display or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant servers are selected If you do not specify selection the status of all servers is displayed U23841 J Z915 6 76 197 Administering servers Configuring Xprint V7 0 Change the status xpchange srv selection modifications For modifications specify the required changes These may be st ACTIVE optional as this is the default or st NOT_ACTIVE si OFF or si ON for the spoolin status and so OFF or so ON for the spoolout status and sa WARM or sa COLD sa standing for system activation for retaining or deleting the print jobs from previous sessions For more detailed information refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual i If you deactivate a server with xpchange srv selection st NOT_ACTIVE all the printers assigned to it are also deactivated All print jobs active on these printers are stopped immediately and set to the
277. specifying a range of pages or strings print from abc to xyz Printing at specific times For every print job you can specify a time when it is to be printed This allows you for example to schedule longer print jobs for nighttime printing In addition you can define that print jobs which have not been printed by a specific time are deleted automatically Printing at a low priority Xprint V7 0 allows priorities to be assigned to print jobs These priorities are user specific which enables print jobs of specific users to be given preference over those of others Less important jobs can be assigned a lower priority U23841 J Z915 6 76 13 Xprint V7 0 elements Introduction to Xprint V7 0 Printing confidential documents Every user and every device under Xprint V7 0 has what is called a security level This allows you to ensure that confidential jobs are only printed on those devices which feature a corresponding security level Selecting forms If there are several forms defined for a device you can specify which of these forms you want to use for printing Forms define the page format and the font attributes of a printout However you can always change the specifications for an existing form to make it meet your specific needs for example by specifying a different typeface for a specific job This also applies if only the default form is defined Using resources that are external to the document Docume
278. splay the job templates available in the system xpshow jtp The system displays a list of all the job templates the Xprint V7 0 adminis trator has defined This list can look for example as follows Name Destination Form Font fe pr rm letter1 printerl 001 020 RESET letter2 printerl 001 001 RESET templatel A5LAND TIMES 001 001 RESET You can use any of the listed templates for your print jobs e Please note that only those job templates are displayed which have l been defined by the Xprint V7 0 administrator Your own job templates in the HOME Xprint V7 0 file are not displayed but can also be used see next page To use the predefined job template temp atel and overwrite the template s priority making it 5 xpadd dr filel te templatel pr 5 For the printout the options defined for this template are used instead of the te option Do not confuse option te job_template with jt job_title i You can modify the options defined in the selected job template by explicitly specifying the relevant options with the modified values in the command line xpadd jtp my_job pr 10 xpadd dr file_l te my_job pr 15 The job is spooled in with the priority 15 U23841 J Z915 6 76 45 Job templates Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 3 6 2 Defining customized job templates Not only the system administrator but also the users themselves can define job templates To do this
279. spoolers where jobs are sent to a qualified print queue Sending jobs to a qualified print queue allows admin istrators to associate print characteristics with each queue e g a form a print density etc For the users this means that selecting a queue automatically selects the characteristics associated with that queue Using this approach each physical printer can be associated with several logical queues each logical queue having its own characteristics The Xprint V7 0 job templates work in a similar way Administrators can define job templates to which they assign a job destination device or device group with print characteristics If users submit their jobs by using templates instead of specifying a destination this has the same effect as using the qualified queues of the other spoolers 3 6 1 Printing a document via a globally defined job template The Xprint V7 0 administrator might have configured job templates in the system These contain all the options required for frequently submitted print jobs of a specific type Users no longer have to enter the individual options but simply select the appropriate template To print a document with a job template use the following option te job_template With this option you can use exactly one predefined job template or a job template you have defined yourself for your print job 44 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Producing Output with Xprint V7 0 Job templates Examples To di
280. st The identifier_list is a list of the loadable resources to be deleted You can also use the option sc1 and then give a selection_criteria_list that specifies certain loadable resources If you do not specify an identifier_list or a selection _criteria _list then all loadable resources will be deleted Example To delete the loadable resources my1ogol mylogo2 and my1logo3 xpdel lrs mylogol mylogo2 mylogo3 6 11 3 Displaying the definition of a loadable resource To display the definition of an existing loadable resource proceed as follows e Display the definition using the following command xpshow lrs Lidentifier_list scl selection_criteria_list di LONG For identifier_list you can give a list of the loadable resource to be displayed or you can use the sc1 option to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant loadable resources are displayed If you do not specify which resources you want to see then they will all be displayed Example The following command will show you which printers my 1 ogo can be used on xpshow Irs scl cn mylogo U23841 J Z915 6 76 173 Administering global job templates Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 12 Administering global job templates A global job template is an object in which frequently used options of the xpadd job command are stored This saves the user the effort of constantly specifying the same options explicitly for frequently recurring print jobs I
281. st Using the additional option ca comment_for_ administrator you Can also assign a comment to the supervisor when adding it to the system e Activate the supervisor xpchange spv supervisor_name Adding a supervisor by copying an existing supervisor Using the xpcopy spv command you can copy existing supervisors in the system quite easily This is useful if the new supervisor is to have similar attributes to an existing supervisor Proceed as follows e Copy the relevant supervisor xpcopy spv name_old_supervisor name_new_supervisor modifications ho host_name For name_old_supervisor specify the name of the supervisor you want to copy For name_new_supervisor specify the name of the new supervisor If the name already exists the command is rejected host_name represents the name of the remote host on which the supervisor is to be added Only the Xprint V7 0 administrator can add a supervisor on a remote host For modifications specify the modifications you want to make Each entry in this list consists of an option of the xpadd spv command as well as a corre sponding value For more detailed information see the description of this command in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual Using the additional option ca comment_for_ administrator you can also assign a comment to the supervisor when adding it to the system e Here also you must activate the supervisor xpchange spv supervisor_name A supervisor tha
282. t Interoperation of F W SNI BS2000 J Xprint domains a mainframe q Figure 12 Interoperation with other spooler systems This means that you can make the printers in remote Xprint V7 0 systems also available to users of the local Xprint V7 0 domain and vice versa the printers of the local Xprint V7 0 domain can be made available to users of remote spooler systems U23841 J Z915 6 76 207 Introduction Interoperability Xprint V7 0 can assume the role of a client that uses the print services of the other spooler system involved or the role of a server that makes its printers available to other systems In the previous figure this is illustrated by two arrows from and to the other spooler system If the arrows are of different colors there are two possible ways of interoperation which depend on the software used These methods are as follows Type of interoperation Description Accessing a BSD printer spooler from Xprint V7 0 i e page 209 sending print jobs to printers connected via a BSD printer spooler Connecting Xprint V7 0 and another printer spooler via a page 213 gateway i e allowing access from Xprint V7 0 to another printer spooler and vice versa Table 27 Interoperation methods These methods are based on two different ways of interconnecting different spooler systems In the case of interoperation with BSD printer spoolers you can allow local X
283. t the print requests for the selected printer groups are rejected With the option ju justification you specify a comment justifying the new spoolin status You can display this comment with the xpstat dgr command This comment is deleted automatically when the si option is changed again with the xpchange dgr command Examples To change the spoolin status of printer group group to OFF with the justifi cation that the group is being modified xpchange dgr groupl si OFF ju group is being modified To deactivate all printer groups which contain printer printer8 remember that all criteria used for selecting the printer groups must be enclosed in quotes xpchange dgr scl dl printer8 si OFF To deactivate all printer groups xpchange dgr si OFF ju complete reorganization 130 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering printer groups 6 5 5 Reactivating a printer group To be able to assign print jobs to a printer group the spoolin status of this printer group must be set to ON e To activate a printer group use the following command xpchange dgr selection si ON ju justification If selection is not specified the command refers to all the printer groups in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the names of the printer groups you want to activate or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list
284. t is copied from the server of a local host to a remote host remains assigned to the server of the source host If you want the supervisor and server to be defined on the same host you should use the option se server_name when copying to immediately assign the new supervisor to a server of the remote host before activating the supervisor See example below U23841 J Z915 6 76 201 Administering supervisors Configuring Xprint V7 0 Examples To define the new supervisor delaware on server nashua and activate it xpadd spv delaware se nashua xpchange spv delaware To define the new supervisor colorado by copying the existing supervisor nashua adding the comment new_supervisor for the Xprint V7 0 adminis trator Then the new supervisor colorado is activated xpcopy spv nashua colorado ca new_Supervisor xpchange spv colorado To define and activate supervisor hudson on the server nashua of the remote host nile adding the comment from_host_colorado for the Xprint V7 0 administrator xpadd spv hudson se nashua ho nile ca from_host_colorado xpchange spv hudson To add supervisor colorado on the server nashua of the remote host nile by copying supervisor delaware from the local host Then the new super visor colorado is activated xpcopy spv delaware colorado se nashua ho nile xpchange spv colorado In this example the option se nashua is used to replace the assignment of the original supervisor delaware to t
285. tain an asterisk which is replaced by the entire pattern i e it is the same as amp Copying and modifying an existing filter With the xpcopy f1t command you can add a filter which has similar attributes to those of a filter already defined in the Xprint V7 0 system For this purpose simply copy the attributes of an existing filter to a new filter and modify the attributes you want to change The new filter is set up on the computer on which the xpcopy f1t command is used This can be avoided by specifying a different host with the ah option e Display the defined filters to check whether the filter to be copied actually exists in the system xpshow flt filter_name For filter_name specify the name of the filter to be copied e Copy the filter xpcopy flt name_old_filter name_new_filter modifications For name_old_filter specify the name of the filter you want to copy For name_new_filter specify the name of the new filter Here you must use a name that does not yet exist in the system otherwise the command is rejected For modifications specify the values you want to modify or add The options correspond to the options that can be used when adding a filter to the Xprint V7 0 system There is however the following restriction The option tp filter_type cannot be modified with the xpcopy f1t command Example To create a new filter called fastmail by copying the filter sl owmail You also want the new filter fastmai
286. tatus display 140 Ww Windows NT 249 Administrators group 253 printer support 253 worksheet 97 104 260 X X Open command lp 17 xpadd option ah 175 option ca 182 U23841 J Z915 6 76 285 Index option cm 162 option cn 172 option co 117 option cs 24 option da 117 option de 19 option dl 127 option dp 37 option ev 36 option fc 35 option fm 40 option fp 35 option fr 22 option ft 40 option hm 24 option ho 133 200 201 option it 162 option je 34 option js 34 option Il 27 option Im 27 option Ir 31 32 option ls 25 option na 36 option nd 36 option nm 36 option ot 162 option pc 19 117 option pl 27 option ps 21 option re 99 106 option rm 33 option rp 37 option rw 37 option sd 28 option se 116 200 option sh 99 106 option sl 124 option sp 34 116 option st 37 option su 117 option te 44 option tm 27 option to 22 option tp 24 162 option vm 25 option wa 38 xpadd command 79 xpadd dev 117 124 xpadd dgr 127 xpadd flt 162 xpadd fnt 152 xpadd frm 157 xpadd hos 99 106 xpadd jtp 174 175 xpadd Irs 32 171 172 xpadd pcl 180 xpadd spv 116 200 xpadd srv 116 194 xpadd usr 98 102 105 133 xpchange option cj 139 option cp 139 option st 203 xpchange command 82 xpchange dev 118 120 161 169 xpchange dgr 118 119 130 131 xpchange spv 201 203 xpchange srv 194 198 xpchange usr 139 xpcopy option ah 128 176 xpcopy
287. te all printers controlled by the host colorado xpchange dev scl ho colorado st NOT_ACTIVE To deactivate all printers you manage xpchange dev st NOT_ACTIVE To deactivate printer printer1 but have all waiting jobs printed before the printer is removed from the network xpchange dev printerl si OFF To deactivate printer printer1 because the paper is being refilled xpchange dev so OFF ju refilling paper U23841 J Z915 6 76 119 Administering devices Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 4 3 Reactivating a printer To be able to submit print jobs for a printer or start printing you must first activate the printer Activate the printer with the following command xpchange dev selection si ON so ON ju justification If you do not specify a selection the command refers to all printers in the system otherwise you can either specify a list of the printers to be activated or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the printers to be activated are selected With the si ON option you can reactivate spoolin only with so ON spoolout only If neither of these options is specified the printer is reactivated completely With the option ju justification you specify a comment justifying the new spoolin status You can display this comment with the xpstat dev comma
288. tem The option np protocol defines whether the TCP IP protocol TCP or the ISO ISO protocol is used The ISO protocol is only available for users For the connection to DPRINT spoolers the print protocol must be selected with the option pp GIP2 With the aa option you can define that the gateway is activated automatically each time Xprint V7 0 is started Defining the partner gateway The partner gateway is defined as follows xpadd gtw dprint_partner tp PARTNER ga port bl local_gw on original_name oh original_host op FT tns_entry 224 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Gateways This command configures a partner gateway named dprint_partner which administers the logical connection to a special DPRINT spooler For dprint_partner any name can be used it does make sense however to use a name which indicates to which DPRINT spooler the gateway is configured With the option oh dprint_host you specify the name of the remote host on which the gateway to the DPRINT spooler is configured Additionally you must specify with on original_name the name of the DPRINT gateway on the corresponding BS2000 system if it is not identical with the gateway name dprint_partner In practice original_name and dprint_host are identical this is the BCAM host name of the BS2000 system in capital letters In this case the definition of the partner gateway also requires the specification of the additional option op
289. ter When Xprint V7 0 is set up in a network the first computer on which it has been installed and started assumes the function of the active master If Xprint V7 0 is terminated on the active master the next potential master in what is called the host hierarchy U23841 J Z915 6 76 73 Xprint V7 0 architecture Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 assumes its function as the active master The ranks of the potential masters can be defined by the order of their installation and can later be modified via specific commands Slave hosts are hosts that hold a complete copy of the Xprint V7 0 database but cannot become the active master host This is useful for example for computers which are shut down frequently are not very reliable or which are still using an old Xprint V7 0 version A parasite host does not have a copy of the Xprint V7 0 database It requires Xprint V7 0 to be running on a specific computer which is assigned to it as the database server also referred to as the supporting host if the parasite host is to access Xprint V7 0 This only makes sense if there is a permanently running database server available for such computers which exports its database via a network file system NFS The database must then be mounted into the local file system by the parasite host e Job templates jtp Job templates simplify the use of frequent print commands by allowing the options of the xpadd job command which must normal
290. ter host you can start configuring Xprint V7 0 by preparing the selected system as follows e Log into the selected system as root e Configure the network services for the communication with Xprint V7 0 etc services file see section Configuring the local area network LAN on page 235 e lf the database was not installed in the course of product installation or has failed for any reason you must initialize it now as follows var spool Xprint config bin DBinstall f e Start the Xprint V7 0 system xpstart Now define the new Xprint V7 0 administrator if you do not want to perform this task any longer as root on the host now defined as the primary master In this manual the user ID xprintadm is used as an example ID for the Xprint V7 0 administrator To configure the Xprint V7 0 administrator proceed as follows e Define the Xprint V7 0 administrator xprintadm as a user of this host e g using the administrator interface sysadm 104 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering hosts users only e Add the user xprintadm to the Xprint V7 0 configuration xpadd usr xprintadm e Modify the Xprint V7 0 configuration such that xprintadm becomes the new Xprint V7 0 administrator xpmod sys ad xprintadm Once you have performed these steps you as the Xprint V7 0 administrator can configure printers and other Xprint V7 0 objects on the host Configuring the other hosts Configure all the other hos
291. ter printer is displayed e Before you can make the changes the printer must be deactivated xpchange dev printer st NOT_ACTIVE e Now assign a form to the printer xpmod dev printer fm form_name printer represents the ID of the printer to which the default form is to be assigned form_name is the name of the assigned form Note Xprint V7 0 automatically checks whether the printer s PCL supports the attributes of the assigned form and the assigned font If this is not the case the xpmod command is not executed A MANUAL form cannot be defined as the default form for a printer e Reactivate the printer xpchange dev printer Examples To add printer printer2 address dev 1p1 and at the same time assign to it the default form invoicel xpadd dev printer2 da dev lpl fm invoicel To assign to the printer printer1 the form forml as its default form xpchange dev printerl st NOT ACTIVE xpmod dev printerl fm forml xpchange dev printerl To cancel the assignment of the form sni_invoicel to the printer printer2 and assign to it the Xprint V7 0 default form GENERIC xpchange dev printer2 st NOT ACTIVE xpmod dev printer2 fm GENERIC or xpmod dev printer2 fm xpchange dev printer2 U23841 J Z915 6 76 161 Administering filters Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 10 Administering filters This section describes how to add filters to the Xprint V7 0 system or how to modify or delete exiting filters T
292. ter s xpchange dev selection 148 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering permission lists 6 7 5 Granting or denying specific users access to a printer group If you want to grant only specific users access to a printer group you can assign a permission list to the printer group To do this proceed as follows e Select a suitable allowed list containing exactly those users who are to be granted access to the printer group or select a denied list containing all those users who are to be denied access to the printer group A list of all permission lists can be displayed with the following command xpshow prm If there is no suitable list defined in the Xprint V7 0 system you can create one yourself see section Creating a permission list on page 144 e Assign the selected permission list to the desired printer group xpmod dgr selection up list_name If selection is not specified the command refers to all the printer groups in the local Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer groups to which you want to assign a permission list or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant printer groups are selected list_name is the name of the selected permission list 6 7 6 Granting or denying specific users access to a
293. tes For references within the manual and to other manuals italics For variable parts of commands fixed pitch In continuous text for commands options file names constants and screen output and menu texts as well as invariable parts of examples bold For emphasis in continuous text fixed pitch and For your input in sample dialogs bold o Actions you must perform p Refers to important information which you should l note A Refers to important information which warns of potential damage U23841 J Z915 6 76 3 Other publications in this set Preface 1 4 Other publications in this set Xprint V7 0 Application Programming Interface API This manual is written for application programmers with a sound knowledge of the C programming language who also have a basic knowledge of the adminis tration and general operation of Xprint V7 0 API Application Programming Interface allows the programmer access to the functions of the Xprint V7 0 system via a programming interface This manual contains information on the C functions and C data structures comprising the API Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual This manual serves primarily as a reference book It contains detailed infor mation on commands and the corresponding options Xprint V7 0 Graphical User Interface Mercator is the graphical user interface for Xprint V7 0 This manual gives an introduction to the product and an over
294. teway connection to another printer spooler can be found in the following sections Type of gateway Description connecting Xprint V7 0 and a BSD printer spooler page 214 connecting two Xprint V7 0 domains page 219 connecting Xprint V7 0 and a DPRINT printer spooler page 223 BS2000 Table 28 Establishing a gateway connection Only the Xprint V7 0 administrator can configure gateways pi o U23841 J Z915 6 76 213 Gateways Interoperability To configure a gateway you must first define the host of the local Xprint V7 0 domain that is to be used as the gateway to the other printer spooler For this purpose you can use any host in the local Xprint V7 0 domain which has access to the physical connection to the target system This host must be reliable robust and fail safe as the connection to the other printer spooler should always be available First a local gateway object is defined for this host The local gateway is responsible for the physical connection to the remote printer spooler For every logical connection to a host in another spooler system it is also necessary to define what is called a partner gateway The partner gateway is assigned to a local gateway and thus to a physical connection Several partner gateways may be defined for access to several remote printer spoolers which all use the same local gateway This however requires that all the remote printer spoolers be of the same
295. th the license string exactly as provided where suffix is any free string allowed in a file name 246 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Installing Xprint V7 0 Installation users only The license string must be on first column of first line of the file The string in some cases may be on two lines each ended with the character Example mkdir etc OSL_LICENCE chmod 0555 etc OSL_LICENCE cat gt etc OSL_LICENCE DPM 0998 JG he iM X3 Ln Fs PM gl Th FH Gj Dq OL gf D chmod 0555 etc OSL_LICENCE DPM 0998 Installation with xpkey The same key can be installed with xpkey as follow xpkey i JG he iM X3 Ln Fs PM gl Th FH Gj Dq OL gf Please refer to the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual for a complete description of xpkey command U23841 J Z915 6 76 247 9 Xprint V7 0 for Windows 9 1 Approach Xprint V7 0 for Windows is the port of Xprint V7 0 UNIX to the Windows Server platform It brings the rich functionality of Xprint V7 0 as a print server to the PC world and co exists amiably with the native Windows spooler Xprint V7 0 on Windows is not a complete rewrite of Xprint V7 0 It is delivered with a run time environment that allows UNIX applications to run on Windows NT or Windows 2000 Only the graphical Xprint V7 0 management interface Mercator has been rewritten to look like a standard Windows application The architecture is identical to the architecture of Xprint V7 0 on UNIX server and sup
296. the course of product installation or has failed for any reason you must initialize it now as follows var spool Xprint config bin DBinstall f e Start the Xprint V7 0 system xpstart Now define the new Xprint V7 0 administrator if you do not want to perform this task any longer as root on the host now defined as the primary master In this manual the user ID xprintadm is used as an example ID for the Xprint V7 0 administrator To configure the Xprint V7 0 administrator proceed as follows e Define the Xprint V7 0 administrator xprintadm as a user of this host e g using the administrator interface sysadm e Add the user xprintadm to the Xprint V7 0 configuration xpadd usr xprintadm e Modify the Xprint V7 0 configuration such that xprintadm becomes the new Xprint V7 0 administrator xpmod sys ad xprintadm Once you have performed these steps you as the Xprint V7 0 administrator can configure printers and other Xprint V7 0 objects on the host 6 1 2 Configuring a new host Configuration hints Xprint V7 0 allows interoperability between different administrative domains which need to be connected by gateways All the hosts in an administrative domain share the same database contents Each definition of an Xprint V7 0 object or change of state involves a database update which must be reflected on each host in the domain This database propagation mechanism requires a reasonably fast network which will allow connections to b
297. the printer name with the de option Defining a default destination With the shell variable XP_DESTIN you can define one or more printers of your Xprint V7 0 domain as the default destination for your print jobs In this case each print job for which you do not explicitly specify a target printer will be printed on this default destination If you have defined more than one printer as the default destination Xprint V7 0 will select a suitable printer To define a default destination you must set the shell variable XP_DESTIN to the names of the desired printers and export it before submitting a print job The individual printers must be separated by spaces If you want to define the default destination for every session with your computer it is recommended that you set XP_DESTIN in a file which is processed for every login e g depending on the shell the file profile or xsessionin your HOME directory Examples To print a document on device printer1 xpadd dr filel de printerl To print a document on printer printer1 via the gateway inuxgtw x padd dr filel de linuxgtw printerl l o print a document on any device belonging to the device group SP211 xpadd dr filel de SP211 To print a PostScript file on any PostScript printer in the network xpadd dr file2 ps pc POSTSCRIPT To print a document on a device with the PCL HP LASERJET belonging to the device group SP211 xpadd dr f
298. the remote system add compatible in the comment field This is necessary if the remote system is an ATT 1p spooler For example to modify the remote printer BSD_PS accordingly use the following command xpmod dev BSD_PS ca queue PS1 host host3 compatible 212 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Interoperability Gateways 7 3 Gateways Gateways allow access to various other spooler systems to other Xprint V7 0 domains to systems with BSD spoolers and to BS2000 systems on which the DPRINT spooler is installed This section describes the characteristics of gateways and how they are configured 7 3 1 Gateway characteristics Gateways allow the bidirectional connection of an Xprint V7 0 domain with other Xprint V7 0 domains 1pd spoolers in BSD UNIX systems e g SunOS Linux Ultrix32 1pd daemons in Novell NetWare servers UNIX SVR4 systems Microsoft Windows NT servers Microsoft Windows 2000 servers etc DPRINT spoolers in BS2000 systems This allows you to make the printers in remote Xprint V7 0 systems also available to users of the local Xprint V7 0 domain and vice versa the printers of the local Xprint V7 0 domain can be made available to users of remote spooler systems 7 3 2 Setting up a gateway connection This section first describes the general rules for and the basic procedure of configuring a gateway connection to another printer spooler A detailed description of how to establish a ga
299. the same license key on different hosts The main advantage of a site license is that you only have to install one key per domain rather than one key on each host in the domain 244 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Installing Xprint V7 0 Installation users only 8 5 4 Installing a license key Where to install a license key Basic license keys and extra feature keys need to be installed on every host where Xprint V7 0 functions are to be enabled Device upgrade licenses and site licenses are global to a domain only one such key has to be installed in a domain One key may cover several features including the maximum number of devices But if several keys are found on a host Xprint V7 0 will merge all the valid ones to determine which features are enabled Two examples will clarify the interpretation of the keys by Xprint V7 0 Example 1 Host B Host C Net Server SAP Net Server i 256 devices Host D Host C has a key for Xprint V7 0 Net Server and the Xprint V7 0 R 3 Kit Both hosts A and D need a key to start Xprint V7 0 either Net Client or Net Server Host D has a second key that allows up to 256 devices This device limit is automatically known throughout the Xprint V7 0 domain If no key is present as for example on host B Xprint V7 0 can be used during a limited period after software installation This possibility is offered only once per version U23841 J Z915 6 76 245 Installation users only I
300. tification BC XOM The Xprint V7 0 R 3 kit offers the following advantages accurate and timely information on the print documents real time asynchronous status feed back tracking of documents improved performance better support of output devices You can find more information on the Xprint V7 0 R 3 kit in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual 2 4 Xprint V7 0 elements This section describes the elements comprising Xprint V7 0 and the possibilities Xprint V7 0 offers its users 8 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to Xprint V7 0 Xprint V7 0 elements 2 4 1 Xprint V7 0 objects Xprint V7 0 is an object oriented system This is also reflected in the way Xprint V7 0 is used Almost all the Xprint V7 0 commands can be used with the different object types which is why the number of Xprint V7 0 commands is relatively low The following section provides an overview of the available objects and their use The following objects are defined in Xprint V7 0 The parentheses contain the short name of the Xprint V7 0 objects for use in Xprint V7 0 commands e The Xprint V7 0 system sys The Xprint V7 0 system refers to all the Xprint V7 0 objects which are combined in a common administrative unit what is called an Xprint V7 0 domain Within the Xprint V7 0 system the Xprint V7 0 administrator is allowed to perform all the administrative tasks e Gateways gtw Gateways allow you to make a connection from one Xpri
301. tivation with the xpchange command can be effected on several levels you can allow only the export of print jobs via the assigned partner gateways only the import from these gateways or both The following command allows both the import and export of print jobs xpchange gtw local_gw If only the import of print jobs is to be allowed you can use the gi ON option to only allow the export use the go ON option Example To configure a gateway connection from the local host nashua to the 1 pd spooler of the BSD UNIX system picasso xpadd gtw GTW_nashua tp LOCAL ga 515 ho hudson np TCP pp BSD aa xpadd gtw GTW_picasso tp PARTNER ho picasso ga 515 b1 GTW_nashua np TCP pp BSD xpmod gtw GTW_nashua ag GTW_picasso xpchange gtw GTW_nashua 7 3 4 Gateways to other Xprint V7 0 domains Xprint V7 0 also allows you to establish gateway connections between independent Xprint V7 0 domains This makes it possible to distribute the administration tasks in fairly large networks for example at department level by assigning each department its own Xprint V7 0 domain with an Xprint V7 0 administrator of its own A connection between the individual domains can then be established via gateways The following figure shows the basic structure of such a gateway connection and the possibilities it offers U23841 J Z915 6 76 219 Gateways Interoperability Domain 1 Domain 2
302. to manage Xprint V7 0 from other hosts use the following command xpmod usr xprintadm hot host_names For host_names you specify all hosts on which the administrator is to be known e Log in to the new system as root e Define the Xprint V7 0 administrator as a system user there if required e g via the administrator interface sysadm e Configure the network services for the communication with Xprint V7 0 etc services file see section Configuring the local area network LAN on page 235 e Initialize the database on the new host with the following command var spool Xprint config bin DBinstall h host_name where host_name represents the name of an already active host e Start the Xprint V7 0 system xpstart Once all these operations have been carried out successfully you can configure printers and other Xprint V7 0 objects on this host The new host is now part of the Xprint V7 0 configuration U23841 J Z915 6 76 107 Predefined printers Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 3 Predefined printers Xprint V7 0 allows you to configure a set of predefined printers quickly and easily This section describes how to add such printers to the system Xprint V7 0 provides a special command for this purpose xpconf_dev With this command you can configure a printer defined in the var spool Xprint config data conf_dev file with the default param eters This file contains a list of printers which can also be extended
303. to use the product at all See the section Product licensing on page 243 for more details e Formore information on installing the product and any last minute modifi l cations refer to the Release Notes delivered with Xprint V7 0 8 2 Configuring the local area network LAN You should configure your LAN before installing Xprint V7 0 otherwise you may encounter problems when using Xprint V7 0 e The following instructions assume that you have experience in adminis l tering local area networks you should also know how to update the entries in the relevant files of your LAN software If you have questions on any of these points refer to the documentation for your LAN software U23841 J Z915 6 76 235 Setting the language for the Xprint V7 0 system Installing Xprint V7 0 To configure a network of type TCP IP you only need to add an entry to the file etc services on each host in the network This entry must have the identifier Xprint V7 0_db the connection number must be the same on all hosts Xprint V7 0_db 5999 tcp Xprint V7 0 the distributed print service The files etc hosts and etc services should at least have the access rights r r r otherwise Xprint V7 0 might not run smoothly 8 3 Setting the language for the Xprint V7 0 system The Xprint V7 0 NLS message files are located in the directory var spool Xprint config MSG The subdirectories En and De contain the
304. ts as described in the following section 6 2 3 Configuring a new host in an existing Xprint V7 0 network Configuration hints Xprint V7 0 allows interoperability between different administrative domains which need to be connected by gateways All the hosts in an administrative domain share the same database contents Each definition of an Xprint V7 0 object or change of state involves a database update which must be reflected on each host in the domain This database propagation mechanism requires a reasonably fast network which will allow connections to be opened quickly and rapid data transfer The required data transfer rate between hosts is in the order of megabits per second A typical example of such a network is Ethernet Different domains can be connected by slower networks possibly wide area networks as there is generally less traffic between domains than within a domain As a guideline experience has shown that there is a practical limit of 50 potential masters slave hosts in a single domain If there are too many potential master slave hosts it is difficult to keep all the databases updated If more than 50 hosts are needed then parasite hosts can be defined or the domain can be divided into a number of smaller domains Parasite hosts import the database from their supporting host potential master or slave by means of a file sharing utility e g NFS which needs to be set up by the administrator Parasite hosts depend o
305. type e g BSD As soon as the connection between these two gateways has been defined and the local gateway has been activated the connection can be used for printing However in this case printing is subject to specific restrictions which depend on the configuration of the partner gateway e To be able to successfully establish a gateway connection to a partner l system it is essential that you make some configurations on the partner system too So that users can print on the remote system via the gateway the remote system must grant the required permission If users of the remote system are to print on the local Xprint V7 0 system the local system must be declared there In any case these measures must be taken in accordance with the descriptions in the relevant system documentation If the other printer spoolers also are to access the local printers via the gateway the partner gateway must additionally be registered as an allowed gateway at the local gateway All allowed gateways allow the corresponding remote hosts access to the resources of the local Xprint V7 0 domain 7 3 3 Gateways to BSD spoolers As with the fast filter bsd configuring a gateway to a BSD spooler also allows users of the local Xprint V7 0 domain to access printers defined in the remote BSD spooler Unlike jobs printed with bsd print jobs printed via gateways can still be administered after submission 214 U23841 J Z915 6 76
306. uality 72 printer 121 print queue delete print job 65 S printer SAP 8 activate 118 120 security level 137 add 103 116 assign to a printer 124 284 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Index assign to a user 141 select language 87 print job 49 selection criteria lists 52 266 server 193 activate 194 197 add 193 change status 197 deactivate 197 define 116 delete 196 display 116 modify attributes 198 simplified definition 195 service 252 set up administrator 98 100 104 107 213 default destination 20 printer group 127 spooler administrator 101 slave 235 SNMP _ 268 spooler administrator setup 101 spooler system stop 102 start 85 stop 86 supervisor 116 200 activate 201 203 add 200 change status 203 deactivate 203 define 200 delete 205 modify attributes 204 simplified definition 201 T typeface 72 U user administer 133 assign security level 141 current print quota 140 define 133 define job priority 136 delete 137 delete from host 135 display privileges 140 display quotas 140 enter for other hosts 134 ID 133 information on 140 maximum number of copies 136 maximum number of jobs 136 maximum number of pages 136 maximum security level 137 number of consumed jobs 139 number of consumed pages 139 privileges 135 reset print quota 138 user administration 133 user ID 133 user privileges grant access to form 149 150 grant access to printer 148 grant access to printer group 149 modify 135 user quotas s
307. ually and there is no automatic configuration of printers 240 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Installing Xprint V7 0 Installation users only 8 5 Installation users only Xprint V7 0 is delivered on a data medium CD ROM magnetic tape cartridge which contains several packages These packages are installed with the pkgadd command The following figure provides an overview of the installation process Fania Xprint a 1 Figure 18 Installation process Reliant UNIX users U23841 J Z915 6 76 241 Installation users only Installing Xprint V7 0 8 5 1 Installation with pkgadd The pkgadd command provides a menu driven installation procedure you only need to follow the instructions or select one of the options offered by the program Start the installation with the following commana pkgadd d lt device_name gt device_name represents the identifier of the device from which you install the software i e the identifier of the magnetic tape drive To install Xprint V7 0 from CD ROM use the system administration interface sysadm Initializing the Xprint V7 0 database To be able to work correctly Xprint V7 0 requires a database This database can be initialized automatically as part of the Xprint V7 0 instal lation process The user is asked whether he she wants a database to be installed or not If the response is yes he she will be asked whether the database is to be installed in any case or only if an al
308. ubmitted for a printer group the job is printed on the first printer to become available in the printer group This section describes the possible steps required for configuring printer groups The following table serves as a guide through this section If you want to Read set up a new printer group or create it from an existing one section Setting up a new printer group on page 127 add a printer to an existing printer group section Adding a printer to a printer group on page 129 remove a printer from a printer group section Removing a printer from a printer group on page 129 deactivate a printer group section Deactivating a printer group on page 130 reactivate a printer group section Reactivating a printer group on page 131 delete a printer group section Deleting a printer group on page 132 grant or deny specific users access to a printer group section Granting or denying specific users access to a printer group on page 149 Table 13 Administering printer groups 126 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering printer groups 6 5 1 Setting up a new printer group There are two possible ways of setting up new printer groups you can either define a completely new printer group or you can copy an existing one and modify it Setting up a completely new printer group e Set up a new printer gro
309. uling them Each server administers its own print queue which contains all the print jobs for the devices whose supervisors are controlled by the server e Supervisors spv A supervisor is directly responsible for controlling one or more devices It obtains the job data from the superordinate server and forwards it to the backend program see the glossary entry Backend on page 273 One supervisor may control several local devices e Device groups dgr Devices can be combined to form what are called device groups to achieve better loading of all the devices in the group If a print job is sent to a device group it is printed on the first device to become available in this group e Devices dev Xprint V7 0 can use devices of many different types The devices are controlled by a supervisor and assigned tools called backends Also a PCL is assigned to the device e Print jobs job Print jobs are submitted by users and as described in the previous section can be modified They are administered by the servers responsible for the respective print queues In addition to the normal manipulation options you can redirect all print jobs for a given device to another device e Forms frm Forms are a convenient way of influencing the appearance of print jobs Forms can be used to define paper and page formats the layup portrait or landscape font appearance of the information pages and user privileges Xprint V7
310. up with the following command xpadd dgr group_name d1 device_list With group_name you assign the new group a name This name must be unique among all printer groups and printers already defined in the system With device_list you specify the names of the printers which are to belong to the new group The printer names must be separated by blanks Printer groups must not be specified in the list The following requirements must be met for the specified printers All printers must already be configured You must have the permission required to address the printers in the printer group Allprinters must be controlled by the same server A print job in the print queue is always handled by a single server If any printer in a printer group were not controlled by the same server as the others in the group this printer would never be used for printing jobs even if it were the first printer available If this is the case use the xpmod dev command to assign the printer to the correct server The spoolin status of the added printer group is automatically set to ON Also the date of the last modification is updated In addition the following options are available for defining the attributes of the printer group up user_permission ah administration_host cu comment_for_user Ca comment_for_administrator For more detailed information refer to the description of the xpadd dgr command in the Xprint V7
311. uring Xprint V7 0 U23841 J Z915 6 76 95 Administering hosts Configuring Xprint V7 0 Not all the possible options for each command can be described in this chapter but only the most important ones For more detailed information see the description of the relevant command in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual For every command you can call online help with the option This online help works on two levels command and option level If you call help on command level the general form of this command will be displayed This type of help displays the objects supported by the command It also shows the options which are independent of the object type Not all the options are displayed however as these depend on the use of acommand and object together To call online help on command level enter xpadd for example Option level help displays all the possible options of a specific object type To call the online help on option level you must specify the xpadd dgr command for example 6 1 Administering hosts This section deals with the Xprint V7 0 objects of type host which must first be edited for new computers in an Xprint V7 0 configuration The following table serves as a guide through this section If you want to Read configure Xprint V7 0 on the first host section Configuring the first host on in a network or on a stand alone page 96 system configure Xprint V7 0 on a
312. use the following command xpdel pcl selection For selection you can either specify a list of unique PCL names or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant PCLs are selected and deleted Examples To delete the PCL HP DESKJET from the system xpdel pcl HP DESKJET To delete all the PCLs which start with the identifier EPSON xpdel pcl EPSON U23841 J Z915 6 76 181 Administering PCLs Configuring Xprint V7 0 6 13 3 Assigning a comment to a PCL For better orientation within the system it may be useful to provide PCLs with comments which may be addressed either to users or to the Xprint V7 0 admin istrator Providing a PCL with a comment for users You can provide a PCL with a comment that every user can display You can do this either when adding the PCL to the system or later when the PCL is already defined e If you want to assign a comment to an existing PCL use the following command xpmod pcl pcl_name cu for_users where pci_name represents the unique name of a PCL and for_users cu stands for comment for user represents a comment which every user is to be able to display using xpshow pcl pcl_name di LONG Examples To display all the PCLs available in the system xpshow pcl SHORT display Name File HC HS Host Administrator
313. user named smith xpdel usr smith To delete all users who are not assigned any privileges xpadd usr user_name pv NONE xpdel usr scl pv NONE 6 6 6 Resetting user print quotas When defining a user you can determine specific quotas to restrict the number of pages or print jobs a user can print When the number of allowed pages or jobs is reached the user can only print again when you reset the print quotas There are two possible ways of resetting a user s print quotas 138 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Configuring Xprint V7 0 Administering users Changing the number of consumed pages e You can change the number of pages a user has consumed i e printed with the cp option xpchange usr selection cp new_consumed_pages If selection is not specified the command refers to all the users in the Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify the name s of the user s for whom the changed print quotas are to apply or you can use the sc1 selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the relevant users are selected The variable new_consumed_pages represents the new counter value for the consumed pages of the user Now the user can print again until the maximum number of allowed pages is reached Once the user has consumed this number of pages any further jobs will be rejected Changing the number o
314. users 6 6 Administering users This section describes the possible ways of administering various users in the Xprint V7 0 system The following table serves as a guide to this section If you want to Read define a user locally or globally for the entire Xprint V7 0 system or grant him her further or new privileges section Defining a user on page 133 delete a user section Deleting a user on page 137 modify the privileges of a user section Modifying user privileges on page 135 modify a user s print quotas section Resetting user print quotas on page 138 display information on users section Displaying information on users on page 140 modify a user s security level section Assigning a security level to a user on page 141 Table 14 Administering users 6 6 1 Defining a user Xprint V7 0 allows the Xprint V7 0 administrator to grant privileges to users For privileges to be granted the users must be defined under Xprint V7 0 There are several different ways of doing this The user privileges can be defined while the user is being added For a detailed description of the possible privileges see the description of the xpadd usr command in the Xprint V7 0 Reference Manual as well as in the section Modifying user privileges on page 135 e To add anew user to the Xprint V7 0 system use the following command x
315. ust be defined with a PARALLEL connection type and the Windows UNC for device address i e the device address is in the form lt hostname gt lt printer gt as in the following example xpadd dev NTPr da D241PCNT HP coPARALLEL pc HP LASERJET where D241PCNT is the name of the Windows computer sharing the printer HP U23841 J Z915 6 76 253 Differences from Xprint V7 0 UNIX Xprint V7 0 for Windows Under Windows the printer must be shared in a way that allows the operation Print for the account System of the Windows station where Xprint V7 0 runs Directly attached printers serial or parallel connection Xprint V7 0 for Windows is able to print to devices connected to the local ports of the computer The device address must be the path to the corresponding Windows reserved file The reserved files for serial printing are COM1 COM2 and for parallel printing LPT1 LPT2 The following examples show how to define a parallel and a serial printer in Xprint V7 0 xpadd dev PCparallel da LPT1 coPARALLEL pc HP LASERJET xpadd dev PCserial da COM1 coSERIAL pc HP LASERJET i If a printer is defined in the native Windows Spooler on a port which is also used by an Xprint V7 0 printer all the jobs printed with Xprint V7 0 are automatically redirected to the Windows Spooler The Spooler manages the concurrence with its own jobs so the jobs from Xprint V7 0 and the native Windows Spooler are properly serializ
316. view of the functions available 4 U23841 J Z915 6 76 2 Introduction to Xprint V7 0 This chapter describes the concepts of Xprint V7 0 which you must be familiar with in order to use this product It describes the objects comprising Xprint V7 0 and how these objects interact 2 1 Xprint V7 0 from the user s point of view From the point of view of the user Xprint V7 0 represents a number of commands and a graphical interface used for printing files For the user the entire Xprint V7 0 system consists of a number of output devices on which documents can be produced see figure below Output devices can be printers fax devices and e mail addresses For historical reasons the word printer is often used instead of output device in the rest of this manual Similarly you should understand the term printing as producing an output Figure 1 The Xprint V7 0 system As a user the first things you deal with are the local workstation on which you are working and the output devices of the Xprint V7 0 system You can use any of the visible output devices for printing your documents It may however be the U23841
317. w dev dgr f1t fint frm jtp Irs pcl xpstat dev dgr 2 Connecting Xprint V7 0 and DPRINT This provides the following function ality job administration functions xpadd job xpdel job xpstat job xpshow job several functions concerning the printer resources xpshow dev dgr xpstat dev In addition to the supported print protocols e g BSD or GIP2 the gateways can be of the type LOCAL or PARTNER Gateways of the type LOCAL represent active Xprint V7 0 objects which are responsible for exporting jobs to partner print 92 U23841 J Z915 6 76 Introduction to administering Xprint V7 0 Rules for configuring the system servers and for receiving jobs sent from partner systems Gateways of the type PARTNER represent remote spooler clients as possible job originators for Xprint V7 0 resources or print service providers Notes on the configuration Every gateway of the type PARTNER which supports a print protocol must have at least a gateway of the type LOCAL with the same print protocol assigned in the backward link list b1 option This list is required for finding a local gateway which is capable of sending jobs to this partner Every BSD print server must be represented by a BSD gateway of the type PARTNER The BSD server can also be accessed via the fast filter bsd The advantage of the fast filter is that Xprint V7 0 converts the data Gateways on the other hand provide additi
318. y As an administrator you can display the status and the definition of local or partner gateways Displaying the definition of gateways e Information on the definition of gateways can be obtained with the following command xpshow gtw selection di display If selection is not specified the command refers to all the gateways in the local Xprint V7 0 system Otherwise you can either specify a list of the gateways on which you want information to be displayed or you can use the scl selection_criteria_list option see section Selection criteria list on page 266 in the Appendix to define a list of criteria according to which the gateways are selected With the option di display you can determine the scope of the display as for all the other Xprint V7 0 objects Displaying the status of local gateways e You can display the status active or not active of a local gateway with the following command xpstat gtw selection di display For selection you have the same options as described under the xpshow command see above Displaying the status of partner gateways e You can display the status of a partner gateway if the corresponding local gateway is in the ACTIVE state with gateway_out enabled For partner gateways all the fields are left empty except the State field Use the following command xpstat gtw selection di display For selection you have the same options as described under th

Agilent Technologies N5181A/82A Portable Generator User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents